PUMP STATION 41 REHABILITATION - 07-0009-UT
PUMP STATION 41
REHABILITATION
(07-0009-UT )
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS &
SPECIFICATIONS
Prepared for
Clearwater
0
FEBRUARY 2010
I
City of Clearwater, Florida
PUMP STATION 41 REHABILITATION
(07-0009-UT)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION IIIa SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer
COVER
Page 11
10/10/2008
1
SECTION
ADVERTISEMENT
FOR BID
fl
SECTION I
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
PUMP STATION 41- REHABILITATION 07-0009-UT
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or
purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address:
www.myClearwater.com/cibTrojects, on THURSDAY March 25, until no later than close
of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as
indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only.
The work for which proposals are invited consists of furnishing and installing all labor and
equipment to rehabilitate Pump Station 41 as shown on the plans and described in the
Contract Documents. This includes all by-pass pumping and piping, new pumps, controls,
valve vault, piping, restoration, traffic control, and all other appurtenances to make a
complete and operational Pump Station 41.
A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on
THURSDAY APRIL 15, 2010 at 10:00 A.M. at the Municipal Services Building, 100 South
Myrtle Avenue, First Floor, MSB Conference Room 131 Clearwater, FL. Representatives of
the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project.
Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Mana§er, at the Purchasing Office, located
at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 So. Myrtle Ave., 3r Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-
5520, until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY APRIL 29, 2010, and publicly opened and read at that hour
and place for PUMP STATION 41 REHABILITATION (PROJECT NUMBER: 07-0009-UT).
A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits
and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers,
vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from
those Contractors that are currently City pre-qualified Contractors in the construction
category of SANITARY SEWER PUMP STATIONS with a minimum pre-qualification
amount of $1,000,000.
Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10)
workdays prior to the bid opening date.
A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects.
The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids.
The City of Clearwater, Florida
George McKibben, Purchasing Manager
(727) 562-4634
SectionI Page I of 1 8/27/2008
SECTION II
INSTRUCTIONS
? TO
BIDDERS
SECTION II
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Table of Contents:
SECTION II ................................................................................................................................... i
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS .......................................................................... 1
2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS .................................................................................. 1
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE ........................:........ 1
4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ....................................................................... 2
5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................... 3
6 CONTRACT TIME .......................................................................................................... 3
7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ............................................................................................. 3
8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 3
9 SUBCONTRACTORS ...................................................................................................... 3
10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM ................................................................................................. 4
11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................................................................................. 4
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5
13 REJECTION OF BIDS .................................................................................................... 5
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER .............................................................................. 5
15 OPENING OF BIDS ......................................................................................................... 5
16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES .............................:............. 5
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT ............................................................................................... 7
19 BID PROTEST .................................................................................................................. 7
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT .......................................................................................... ... 8
21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES ....................................................................................... 8
SectionII
i
7/17/2008
1
Section II -- Instructions to Bidders
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan
Room - website address: www.myclearwater.com/cityproiects. Price of Contract
Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only,
which is non-refundable. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications,
bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified
bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a
possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor"
package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items.
1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor
the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others.
1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so
only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant
any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose.
2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the
City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial
resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining
drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre-
qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering
Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-
4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street
address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and
delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14)
days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City
do not have to make reapplication.
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in
any manner affect cost, progress, performance or famishing of the work; (c) consider and
abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and
(d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and
notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification
of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have
been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely
upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical
data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the
purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical
conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities)
which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in
SectionII Page 1 of 9 7/17/2008
' Section II - Instructions to Bidders
preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical
data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of
bidding or construction.
' 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the
City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not
assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in
the Contract Documents.
' 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions,
possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing
conditions appear in the General Conditions.
3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or filrnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
' explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for
submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former
condition upon completion of such explorations and tests.
' 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by
the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the
' Contract Documents.
3.8 Tlie submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the
' Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that,
without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required
by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures
of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work.
' 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
' 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the
Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response
to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all
' parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents.
Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be
answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and
other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect.
SectionII Page 2 of 9 7/17/2008
Section 11 - Instructions to Bidders
4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
City or Engineer.
5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in
an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of
a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the
requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted.
5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed
the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the
Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the
Agreement and famish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract
by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be
forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable
chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of
the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid
opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after
the Bid opening.
5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company
qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida.
6 CONTRACT TIME
6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set
forth in the Technical Specifications.
7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement.
8 . SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the
Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or
"or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications
that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance
will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract
Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General
Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications.
9 SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so
requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer
an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence
of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the
Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed
fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If
the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed
SectionIT Page 3 of 9 7/17/2008
F
Section II -• Instructions to Bidders
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award
of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable
substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder
declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest
and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not
constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom
the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the
City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance
after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions.
9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or
organization against whom he has reasonable objection.
10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM
10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in
ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder
must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations
or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract
Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump
sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for
completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be
found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the
work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the
work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct
proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items.
10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be
shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or
partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind
the corporation or partnership.
10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general
partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the
partnership shall be shown below the signature.
10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5"x11" manila envelope with the
project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid
shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof
and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be
received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified.
Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted.
1 SectionII
Page 4 of 9 7/17/2008
Section II - Instructions to Biddcrs
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of
Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person
duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to
submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for
receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for
typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a
typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the
requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction
is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or
modify any bid.
13 REJECTION OF BIDS
13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City
reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds
for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized
alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or
irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City
believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that
Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful
financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the
City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in
the interest of the public.
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists
among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future
proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit
contained in the Contract Documents.
15 OPENING OF BIDS
15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement
for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply
with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which
in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees
and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical
Specifications.
16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically
SectionTT Page 5 of 9 7/17/2008
' Section II - Instructions to Bidders
stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be
' stated by the Contractor.
16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law.
The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales
' tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the
WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase
(ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV - Technical
Specifications and as defined in Section III - General. Conditions.
' 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
' 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor
Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders
with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with
' respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of
commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has
implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process.
' Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied
bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace
program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six
statements and the accompanying certification statement:
(1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,
dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and
' specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such
prohibition.
(2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy
of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and
employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for
' drug abuse violations.
(3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that
are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
' (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of
working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will
' abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or
plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled
substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the
' workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
(5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance
' or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee
who is so convicted.
SectionII
(6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above
requirements.
Page 6 of 9
7/17/2008
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words.
Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in
favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of
figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or
not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may
be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and
experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by
the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City
deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility,
qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and
other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive
Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the
best interest of the City.
18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items
in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will
be awarded to only one Contractor.
19 BID PROTEST
19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the
solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with
the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with
protest procedures set forth in this section.
19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE:
A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for
proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the
opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved
person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts
giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals.
Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the
bid/request document itself.
B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of
five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each
bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders
upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite
specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly
been violated.
C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be
granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have
knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of
SectionII Page 7 of 9 7/17/2008
1
1
1
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions
should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception.
D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5)
work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated
with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager.
E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager,
he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that
response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original
formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City
Manager.
F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the
matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10)
work days of receipt of the appeal.
19.3 PROTEST FEE:
When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5%
of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the
protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing
Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid.
19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the
Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all
administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written
determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best
interest of the City.
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT
20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance
related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety
Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s
1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws.
21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES
21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit
and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater
management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively
reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters.
SectionII
A. The control of construction-related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining
water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control
practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment
loadings to surface waters.
Page 8 of 9
7/17/2008
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and '
sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion
and sediment control provisions.
NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater En ineerin '
Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction-related Best
Management Practices.
References EPA website '
SectionII Page 9 of 9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7/17/2008
SECTION III
i
i
GENERAL
i
i CONDITIONS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Table of Contents:
1 DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................ ..1
2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS ......................................................................................... .. 5
2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE .......................... .. 5
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS .......................................................................................... .. 5
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING
THE PROJECT .............................................................................................................. .. 5
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ................................................................... .. 5
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ...................................................................... .. 6
2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS .............................................................................................. .. 6
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ....................................................................... .. 7
3.1 INTENT ......................................................................................................................... .. 7
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES ................................................ .. 7
4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCE POINTS .................................................................................................. .. 8
4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS ....................................................................................... .. 8
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS .......................................................................... .. 8
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ................................... .. 8
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS .................................................................................................. .. 9
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE .......................................................................................... .. 9
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND ............................. .. 9
5.2 INSURANCE ................................................................................................................. .. 9
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATIONINSURANCE ......................................................... 10
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITYAND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE ............................ 10
5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE A UTOMOBILE LIABILITY .................................................... 11
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS .................................................................................................. 12
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES ..................................................................... 12
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 12
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 13
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS .............................................................. 14
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 14
6.5 USE OF PREMISES ...................................................................................................... 15
65.1 STAGING AREAS .................................................................................................... 15
6. 5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS ................................................................................ 15
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... 16
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS ...................................................................................... 16
6.8 PERMITS ....................................................................................................................... 16
6:9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 17
6.10 EMERGENCIES ............................................................................................................ 18
6.11 DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................. 18
SectionIII i 11/17/2 008
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW ........................ 18
611.2 AS-B UILT DRA WINGS ............................................................................................ 19
611.3 CAD STANDARDS ................................................................................................... 21
611.4 DELIVERABLES: .................................................................................................... 22
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ........................... 22
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ........................................................................................ 23
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION .................................................................................................... 23
OTHER WORK .............................................................................................................. 24
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ......................................................................................... 24
7.2 COORDINATION ........................................................................................•................ 24
OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 24
OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............. 25
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ................................................................................... 25
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ........................................................ 25
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................................................ 25
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 25
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES ........... .............................................................................. 26
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES ............. 26
CHANGES IN THE WORK .......................................................................................... 27
CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ................................................................... 28
11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE .................................................................... 28
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 29
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................................................... 29
CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... 30
TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE .
OF DEFECTIVE WORK ............................................................................................... 31
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION .......................................................................................... 31
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK ....................................................................................... 31
13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK ....................................... 32
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................ 32
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ...................................................................... 32
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................... 33
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK ....................................................... 33
PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 34
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................... 34
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ............................................................... 34
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ................................ 35
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 35
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION ................................................................................................... 36
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ................................................................... 36
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................................... 37
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ................................................................................................. 3
4
37
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
SectionIII ii 11/17/2008
1.5 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 37
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK ...................................................................... 37
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE ...................................................................................... 38
15.3
16 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ...........................................
DISPUTE RESOLUTION .............................................................................................. 39
39
' 17
17.1 MISCELLANEOUS .......................................................................................................
SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ........................... 40
17.2 GIVING NOTICE ................................................•......................................................... 40
1 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM ..................................................................................................... 40
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ..................................... 40
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................. 40
1 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION .................................................................................................... 40
18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK .............................................................. 40
' 19 MATERIAL USED .......................................................................................................... 41
20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................... 41
1 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION ....................................................... 41
22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION .......................... 41
' 22.1
22.2 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................
EXAMPLE ............................................. ...................................................................... 41
42
23
23.1 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ............................................................................
SCOPE AND PURPOSE ............................................................................................... 42
42
23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE ................................................. 43
23.3
23.4 FIXED SIGN ..................................................................................................................
PORTABLE SIGNS ...................................................................................................... 43
43
23.5 SIGN COLORING ......................................................................................................... 43
' 23.6
23.7 SIGN PLACEMENT .....................................................................................................
SIGN MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................ 43
43
23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN .......................................................................................... 44
1 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................. 44
I SectionIII
III
11/17/2008
Section Ill - General Conditions
1 DEFINITIONS
Addenda
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct
or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agreement
The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed;
other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as
provided therein.
Application for Payment
The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress
or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Contract Documents.
Approve
The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or
methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given
in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer
to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
Bid
The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices for the work to be performed.
Bidding Documents
The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the
proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bonds
Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order
A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement.
City
The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida.
Construction Inspector
A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects
City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the
intent of the Contract Documents.
Construction Manager
The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The
Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction
contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the
Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding
contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the
Owner's Representative during construction.
SectionIII Page I of 45 11/17/2008
t
1
Section 111- General Conditions
Construction Coordinator
A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and is
responsible for the administration of construction documents.
Contract Documents
The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation
submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the
Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any
Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits
identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of
the Agreement.
Contract Price
The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work.
Contract Time
The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
Contractor
The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of
this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has
been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative.
Critical Path Method Construction Schedule-CPM
A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate
to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work
in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution
of the schedule.
Day
A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective
An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the
Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final
payment.
Drawings
The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement,
which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been
prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop
drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Engineer
The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the
purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County,
Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as
the Owner's Representative during construction.
SectionIII Page 2 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
Engineer's Consultant
A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent
professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as
such in the Supplementary Conditions.
F.D. D. T Specifications
The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida
Department of Transportation (latest English edition).
Furnish
The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar
meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and
install complete in place and ready for service".
Inspection
The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to
ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and
Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or
overseeing.
Laws and Regulations
Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind
of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction.
Liens
Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal
property.
Milestone
A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to the final completion date.
Notice to Proceed (NTP)
A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the
Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his
obligations under the Contract Documents.
Owner
Person
Project
The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the
City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be
responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed.
For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative
during construction.
A natural person or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial
entity.
The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents
may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Partial Utilization
Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is
intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
SectionlII Page 3 of 45 11/17/2008
1
1
' Section III - General Conditions
' Representative of Contractor
The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the
construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these
' persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction
conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City
Engineer.
Request for Information (RFI)
An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from
the Contractor to the Engineer.
Shop Drawing
All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically
' prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations,
brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other
information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or
equipment for some portion of the Work.
Specifications
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the
Work nand certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor
A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
' Substantial Completion
The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the
opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so
that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended;
or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment
as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms
"substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the
Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions
The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions.
Supplier
A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct
' contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor.
Surety
Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be
responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid,
Performance or Payment Bond.
Underground Facilities
All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such
1 facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity,
SectionIII Page 4 of 45 11/17/2008
1
Section III - General Conditions
gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or
water.
Unit Price Work
Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
Work
The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result
of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the
construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as
required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive
A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement
and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be
performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or
Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or
documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued
Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract
Price or Contract Times.
2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE
When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to
the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by
this contract.
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor two (2) copies of Contract Documents for execution.
Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO
. PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT
The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor
shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall
be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run.
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable
field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or
discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or
clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however,
Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy
SectionIII Page 5 of 45 11/17/2008
r Section Ill -- General Conditions
in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the Owner or
' Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify
any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any
time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this
' insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
' Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's
Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor,
Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the
parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures.
Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the
' Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction
conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction
Manager.
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a
color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events
including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this
conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also
bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is
complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log.
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a
completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List.
The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a
project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of
construction stakeout and as-built survey.
The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a
Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for
reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification.
2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS
The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a
weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall
bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a
look-ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting,
and all material test reports generated in the same time period. The City's Construction
Coordinator typically chairs these meetings.
SectionIII Page 6 of 45 11/17/2008
1
Section III - General Conditions
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT
3.1 INTENT
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents
are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of
the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment
which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or
from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and
performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well-
known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials
or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning.
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's
Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society,
organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority,
whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification,
manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be
otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any
referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by
reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents,
shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's
Representative, or any of their agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract
Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's
Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in
these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and
enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such
provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the
Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion.
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES
If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or
discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any
provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any
such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor
shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed
with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to
Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General
Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's
Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless
Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof.
SectionIII Page 7 of 45 11/17/2008
t
1
r
F
' Section III - General Conditions
4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
' 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS
The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the
Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands
which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or
restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with
which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent
structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner,
unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS
Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for
identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical
conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which
have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such
reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any
' subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially
from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review
those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner. or Engineer
' shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer
and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there
are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the
contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a
work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
' 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to
Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise
expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for
the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following
' will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i)
reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of
such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such
Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The
Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER
prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a
member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any
' excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the
protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in
local telephone directory.
I
Sectionlll Page R of 45 11/17/2008
1
Section III - General Conditions
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS
Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which
in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor
shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference
points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner
and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or
destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be
responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor
licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for
more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew
is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of
Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the
Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual
time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge
of one hour.
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND
Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the
Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's
obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after
the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws
and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as
are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the
Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of
"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as
Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff,
Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an
agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall
be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such
language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified
to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety
on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to
do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet
the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice
thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner.
5.2 INSURANCE
Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the
Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below
which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and
Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or
furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts
any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability
benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily
Sectionlll Page 9 of 45 11/17/2008
fl
1
1
1
11
1
Section III - General Conditions
injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability
coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related
to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v)
Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner,
with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of
insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional
insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this
paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and
maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect
of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include
coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include
completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's
indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or
endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal
refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor
and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a
certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the
Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at
all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in
accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed
operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in
effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall fim ish the Owner and each
other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of
insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of
continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and
telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer.
The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the
following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations:
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE
Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount
$1,000,000. and Over
(1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory
(2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000.
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE
Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and
Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual,
Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities:
SectionIII Page 10 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate
5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles:
Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount
$1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person
$500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident
(2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar
document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which
may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for
purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor,
Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's
Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide
full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be
accepted without prior approval from Owner.
Lon share and Harbor Worker's Cam ensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932,
requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of
benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S.
Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer.
For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable
for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7,
8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor
fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to
secure the payment of compensation.
SectionIII Page I I of 45 11/17/2008
1
1
1
1
t
Section Ill - General Conditions
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS
The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on
Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants
and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured
or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and
damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the
effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of
recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor
waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents
for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by
such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all
such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or
entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured
under such policies for losses and darnages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to
the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise
payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor,
Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and
agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential
loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused
by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and;
(ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting
from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed
Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or
after final payment.
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be
responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means,
method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and
expressly required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a
competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's
Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be
Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All
communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The
Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted
whenever necessary.
Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's
Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed
SectionlIl Page 12 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the
Owner's Representative.
Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a
result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally
approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign
an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his
records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the
Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full
reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the
Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on
weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be
$60.00 per hour.
Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary
accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the
requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer.
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct
the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good
discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of
persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated
in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours
and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday,
or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and
machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and
equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and. secure storage for all materials to be used
in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly
stored, maybe rejected by the Engineer without testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to
be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in
the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of
Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures.
SeetionIII Page 13 of 45 11/17/2008
t
1
1.1
Section III - General Conditions
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the
specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or
"or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material
or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an
item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and
sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by
Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment
proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a
proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the
Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is
essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review
of proposed substitute and "or equal." will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other
than Contractor.
Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to
' Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a
determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or
equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
' evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of
acceptability.
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND
OTHERS
' Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a
direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer
and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of
Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating
the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the
work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all
Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to
communicate with the Engineer through Contractor.
' The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
' work to be performed by any specific trade.
All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
' binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
SectionIII Page 14 of 45 11/17/2008
1
Section 111 - General Conditions
Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable
objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable
objection.
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his
Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.
6.5 USE OF PREMISES
Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract
Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and
easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any
such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting
from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant
because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party
by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in
or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify
and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors,
employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or
resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant
against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or
based upon Contractor's performance of the Work.
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the
Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials,
rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all
property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
6.5.1 STAGING AREAS
The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging
and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction.
6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS
The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the
Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed:
• Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days.
• Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive
calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times.
• All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP.
• Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is
generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days.
Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times.
SectionIII Page 15 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
• Sod must be restored with ten (10) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe
pressure test. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed.
Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times.
' If the project or a portion of it does not involve right-of ways, then a different schedule of sod
restoration may be considered.
' 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES
Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in
the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is
subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to
others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract
' Documents.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents
' and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and
damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident
to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
' invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall
defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental
agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work.
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
' furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be
responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor
performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations,
Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work:
however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the
Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not
relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as
described above.
6.8 PERMITS
' Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in
obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and
inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of
opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work,
and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as
' plant investment fees.
SectionIII Page 16 of 45 11/17/2009
1
Section f I I - General Conditions
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees
will be waived.
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for
the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i)
all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials
and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other
property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation
or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work,
or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall,
and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or
injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or
materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or
any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and
replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident
prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and
supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition,
avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid
services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an
effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of
contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition.
Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there
is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of
immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This
provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the
Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all
safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract
performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic
materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall
take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent
disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss;
and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor
shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection,
removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property
caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any
other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish
any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by
Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall
continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner
and Contractor that the Work is acceptable.
SectionTTT Page 17 of 45 11/17/2008
1
1
t
Section III - General Conditions
6.10 EMERGENCIES
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or
the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor
shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in
the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's
Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the
action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or
Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action.
6.11 DRAWINGS
1 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW
1
1
1
1
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the
Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will
be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples
to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample,
Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions,
specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar
information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication,
shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work,
and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop
Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work
and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that
Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to
Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall
give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample
submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a
written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific
notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and
approval of each such variation.
The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and
Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the
Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The
Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The
Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress
meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty-one (21) consecutive
calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay
claim from the Contractor.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to
the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of
the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's
SectionIll Page 18 of 45 11/17/2008
Section 11l - General Conditions
review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will
not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make
corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall
direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer
on previous submittals.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of
submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor
will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with
the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor.
6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order
and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and
annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes
or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans,
including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the
construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the
plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not
indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which
are revealed during the construction period.
The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant,
and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project.
The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for
accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the
monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not
conform to the ``As-Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the
Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay
request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As-Built Drawings have been reviewed by
the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness.
Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains.
The Owner's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings.
6.11.2.1 General
The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61G17-6, Florida
Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land
surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built
Drawings and an AutoCAD file.
SectionIII Page 19 of 45 11/17/2008
11
1
1
Section III - General Conditions
61G17-6.002 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal
and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and
delineated: also know as Record Survey.
' This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction
Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will
procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and
will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the
Owner with the required As-Built Survey.
6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems
1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation)
based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the
construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service
connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes,
cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions,
pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if
one exists.
2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted.
' 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain)
All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the
approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction
plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new
and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described
' above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear
type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points.
6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring
The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built
drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where
' this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall
prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional
conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic
' diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder
diagram.
1 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control
The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans
' or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of
1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement
shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or
' vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department.
1
Scctionlll Pagc 20 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III W General Conditions
6.11.2.6 Standards
The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61 GI7 and the
Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that
pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points
at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes.
6.11.2.7 Other
The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same
level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans.
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS
6.11.3.1 Layer Naming
6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes
DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities
EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected -
EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols
PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols
FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line
work and symbols
TX suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix
6.11.3.1.2 Laver Namina Definitions:
GAS gas lines and appurtenances
ELEC power lines and appurtenances
PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances
CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances
BOC curbs
WALK sidewalk
WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers
STORM storm lines and appurtenances
TREES trees, bushes, planters
SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances
FENCE all fences
BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation
DRIVE driveways
EOP edge of pavement without curbs
SectionIII Pagc 21 of 45 11/17/2008
1
f]
1
1
1
Section III - General Conditions
TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes
TOPBANK top of bank
TOESLOPE toe of slope
TOPBERM top of berm
TOEBERM toe of berm
SEAWALL seawall
CONCSLAB concrete slabs
WALL walls, except seawall
SHORE shoreline, water elevation
CL centerline.of road
CLD centerline of ditch
CLS centerline of swale
CORNER property corners, monumentation
BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks
Other layers may be created as required, using above format.
' 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties
All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer.
All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer.
All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts.
6.11.3.3 Text Styles
Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008
times the plot scale.
Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text
height of .010 times the plot scale.
6.11.4 DELIVERABLES:
The as-built survey shall be produced on vellum or bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 "=20'
unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format.
Acceptable file formats include: DWG, DXF of a shape file.
Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail
address Thomas.Mahony(i?myclearwater.com.
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
' Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work
will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's
warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism,
' SectionIII Pa e 22 of 45 11/17/2008
S
Section III - General Conditions
modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until
the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the
Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part
thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution
or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own
expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its
completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any
defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom
which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance".
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by
Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work,
which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the
Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of
Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by
Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's
Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by
the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or
any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review
and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance
by the Engineer.
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK
Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the
officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other
dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work,
provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness,
disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself),
including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any
negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or
omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such
indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person.
If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor
shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or
Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so
settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such
account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who
SectionIII Page 23 of 45 11/17/2008
1
Section III - General Conditions
shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims
against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or
employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any
Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of
the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation
under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of
damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor,
Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts
or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this
paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers,
directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any
of them.
7 OTHER WORK
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE
The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and
perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether
related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for
these purposes.
The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work
will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity
is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with
the Contractor's work or schedule.
7.2 COORDINATION
If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site,
the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and
responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be
identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be
itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and
responsibility in respect of such coordination.
8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all
communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative.
' The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly
and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General
Conditions.
The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The
Work.
The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in
the Article on Tests and Inspections.
SectionIII Page 24 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer
may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's
right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances.
Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be
responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE
Dependant of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will
either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The
duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written
consent of Owner and Engineer.
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of
the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of
Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine
necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract
Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued
form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding
on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation
justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to
agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as
provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time.
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK
The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work
which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's
Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to
the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the
completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's
Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of
the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS
In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop
Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change
Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection
SectionlIT Page 25 of 45 11/17/2008
fl
1
1
fl
1
1
Section III - General Conditions
with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on
Payments to Contractor and Completion.
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract
Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other
matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the
Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under
the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will
be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in
accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will
be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement
promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event
giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and
the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's
Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more
accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit
any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of
the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's
Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the
opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's
written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner
and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty
(30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a
Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or
(ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention
to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor
to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision
and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction
to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim,
dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60)
days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and
Contractor.
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the
Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision
rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative
with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any
exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have
under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute
or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
' 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S
RESPONSIBILITIES
' Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any
other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in
good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking,
exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall
Sectionlll Page 26 of 45 11 /17/20OR
'
Section III - General Conditions
create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or ,
agent of any of them.
Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be '
responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of
Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of '
the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or
furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any '
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any
of the work. '
Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying
documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and
certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered
by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of .inspections, tests and
approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. '
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to
Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. '
10 CHANGES IN THE WORK
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any '
time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions,
deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work
Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with '
the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract
Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
If
h
t
e Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the
Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a
Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. '
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions '
except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in
article for Uncovering Work.
The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments
recommended by Owner's Representative covering:
changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance '
of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective
Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the
parties; '
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
1
sectioniii Page 27 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
' changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on
Disputes;
' provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any
such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable
Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and
adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract
' Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's
responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
' 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
' 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations
t assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the
Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written
' Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice
of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days)
t after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the
claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such
occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to
' submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by
claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the
claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the
' Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any
Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be
determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the
Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii)
where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by
a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii)
' where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work.
Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
' where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and
Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for
' directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall
apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and
other items of direct costs required for the directed work.
The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items:
1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual
' payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes
SectionIII Page 28 of 45 11 /17/20OR
1?
Section I I I - General Conditions
established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with
negotiating the subject change.
2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall
be substantiated through vendors' invoices.
3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation
costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current
rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as
the full-unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment
and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs
associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor-owned
equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize
lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed
estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for
equipment on stand-by.
4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater.
The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed
by the Contractor or Subcontractor.
A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If
work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five
percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%).
B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above.
C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4.
The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general
supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense.
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such
sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances
include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment
required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii)
Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract
Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the
foregoing will be valid.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's
Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by
allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall
be correspondingly adjusted.
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK
Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to
Sectionill Page 29 of 45 11/17/2008
Section 111- General Conditions
the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times
the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of
items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of
Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's
Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to
be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The
Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if. (i) the quantity
of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from
the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no
corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes
that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred
additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract
Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On
unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily
complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project
construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a
finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually
used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract
Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor
in his original bid.
' 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on
written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's
Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of
the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence,
unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate
data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that
the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believc it is
entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract
Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an
adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with
the requirements of this paragraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones)
may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made
therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the
Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the
Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the
article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God.
Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be
delays within the control of Contractor.
SectionIII Page 30 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension
of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall
be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable
to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or
employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused
by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including
but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by
utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for
Other Work.
13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the
Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and
testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these
inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in
the Contract Documents..
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such
public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments,
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or
approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required
certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner
permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and
obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required
for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work,
or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase
thereof for incorporation of the Work.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by
Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this
paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative
and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's
Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if
requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and
replaced at Contractor's expense.
SectionIII Page 31 of 45 11/17/2008
1
I
Section III - General Conditions
If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by
Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's
request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing
as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question,
furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting
from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory
replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price
for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof,
may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however,
such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract
Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if
the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim
therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order
Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to
any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of
Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this
paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract
Price.
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either
correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has
been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with
Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by
or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others).
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may
1 be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee
required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any
' Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in
accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has
been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective
' and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of
others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such
instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the
' Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and
SectionIII Page 32 of 45 11/17/2008
1
Section III -- General Conditions
all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by
Contractor.
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from
an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written
Amendment.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such
Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and
replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner
prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation
of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's
Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner
Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating
the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall
be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree
as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for
Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's
recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the
Owner.
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to
correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's
Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or
if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if
Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may,
after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In
exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously.
In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from
all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's
services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the
site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall
allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors,
and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable
the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and
damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be
charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary
revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to
an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of
SectionIII Page 33 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs
' of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or
replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the
Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable
' to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder.
14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
' Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units
completed.
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for
' review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work
completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated
' in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not
incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully
installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of
the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as-built survey
and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and
acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be
construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. '
The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and
' work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an
Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site
marked up as-built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the
' Contract Documents.
In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative
may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any
' progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have
been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report
' as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the
report is provided.
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by
any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner
' no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work
shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a
conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller.
' Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work,
free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner
harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers,
' workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment,
power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract.
Contractor shall at the Owenr's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the
' SectionIII Page 34 of 45 11/17/2008
Section iII -- General Conditions
nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do
so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid
bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid
compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful
claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged,
whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this
Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any
obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the
Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the
Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and
the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith.
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) days after receipt of each Application for
payment, either indicate a recommendation of payment and present Application to the Owner, or
return the Application to Contractor indicating Owner Representative's reasons for refusing to
recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and
resubmit the Application. Owner's Representative may refuse to recommend the whole or any
part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative may also refuse to recommend any such
payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent
inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be
necessary in Owner Representative's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the
Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement,
(ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has
been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative has
actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension
of Work and Termination.
The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's
Representative because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's
performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work,
except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the
satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set-
off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the
events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor immediate notice of refusal
to pay with a copy to the Owner's Representative, stating the reasons for such actions, and
Owner shall promptly phy Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed
to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the
reasons for such action.
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION
Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which
(i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the
Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference
with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final
Completion of all the Work subject to the following:
Sectionlll Page 35 of 45 11/17/2008
Scuion III - General Conditions
The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such
' part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially
complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor
will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is
substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial
Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's
Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work
' ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time
' after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make
an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not
consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that
' part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial
Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial
' Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and
access thereto.
' 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and
' Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals
that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch
list and assign a date for this work to be completed. Contractor shall immediately take such
measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
' After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative
and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating
' instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other
evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of
inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other
documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for
progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as
previously delivered) by: (I) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including
' but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii)
consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally
effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in
connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the
Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i)
the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien
' could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness
connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be
' responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to
furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral
satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien.
1
SectionIII Page 36 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all
surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an
acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the
prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE
If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if
Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final
Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without
terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully
completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully
completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have
been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the
surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and
accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for
such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final
payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's
Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations
under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in
writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment.
Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the
Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Engineer will return the
Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final
payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and
substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the
amount recommended by Owner's Representative.
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner
against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing
after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any
special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the
Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than
those previously made in writing and still unsettled.
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK
At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion
thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which
will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date
so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the
SectionlII Page 37 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
' Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an
approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of
Contract Time.
' 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE
Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails
' to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to,
failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere
to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time);
' if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative;
' if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this
' Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the
Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise
than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to
' the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or
that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed.
The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and,
' to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude
Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools,
appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent
' they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion),
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has
paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem
expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the
Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and
damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such
excess will be paid to Contractor.
If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
' difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be
reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by
Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any
' rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price
for the Work performed.
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not
affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may
thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not
' release Contractor from liability.
Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may,
without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate
' the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
Sectionlll Page 38 of 45 11/17/2008
1
Section 1.11- General Conditions
for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract
Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable
sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses;
for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts
with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly
attributable to termination.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE
If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety
(90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's
Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is
submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to
be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's
Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner
payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if
the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement
and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act
on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has
failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor
may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work
until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended
to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or
Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to
Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article.
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for
resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution
method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for
resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on
Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may
otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any
dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding
arbitration.
SectionIII Page 39 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
17 MISCELLANEOUS
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS
' The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other
documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall
be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner.
1 17.2 GIVING NOTICE
t
[l
1
1
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice
will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of
the notice.
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM
Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any
error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or
agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to
the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The
provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the
provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED
Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in
each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without
the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights
to notice of assignment.
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION
Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2)
years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions
and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or
in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be
agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds,
and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction
Department.
18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to
the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the
Contractor shall work and order thereof.
SectionIII Page 40 of 45 11/17/2008
1
Section III - General Conditions
19 MATERIAL USED
All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by.
the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all
materials.
20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or
discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General
Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical
Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern.
21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION
The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of the project's
documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in
the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is
exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable
taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The
Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various
construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner purchasing of
construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis.
Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. See
SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION for ODP items included in the Contract
Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents.
22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
22.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500-foot radius,
unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating
the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing
the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of
construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water
service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the
Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo
(optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances
which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the
scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by
the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and
durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-'/ by 11 inches in size. Notification (door
hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's
activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected
by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas,
equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor
cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to
maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain
appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours.
SectionIII Page 41 of 45 11/17/2008
1
fl
Section III - General Conditions
Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items
provided in the contract proposal.
22.2 EXAMPLE
CITY SEAL
Of
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION
TODAY'S DATE: _/_/
PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE
We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater
in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property.
This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property
of the pending start of construction.
(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners)
The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way.
Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the
contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks
will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for
the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors,
textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or
structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due.to the construction process will
not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property
owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within
the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere.
We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or
any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent
at (727)
Construction is anticipated to begin on:
We will be more than happy to assist you.
Company Name
Company Address
Contractor Phone Number
23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public
funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this
purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during
the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active
work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s)
shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in
SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION.
SectionIII Page 42 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE
Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended
locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined
after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on
sign at the preconstruction conference.
23.3 FIXED SIGN
Fixed sign shall be 4-foot by 6-foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade
plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2-inches. Sign shall be attached to a
minimum of two (2) 4-inch by 4-inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts
and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring
in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate
mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for
approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint.
23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS
Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24-inches by 30-inches (24"00") in size and will be
attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.0$0-
inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl
lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic
barricade.
23.5 SIGN COLORING
Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other
lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional
to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall
be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black.
23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT
Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the
project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either
pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the
signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of-
way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations
of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in
several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and
will remain in place until the request for final payment.
23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement,
removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The
Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs
are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced.
SectionIII Page 43 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN
F
\
. PROJECT NAME
?
(CONTRACT NUMBER)
DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT
CONTRACTOR:
COMPLETION DATE:
FUNDING:
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:
Clearwater
U
3
'! 2'- 3"
L
7
I? 4..x4' P. T,
Post (Typ.)
N
77747
24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (S) calendar days after the
Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in
Article 2 of these General Conditions.
It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number
of consecutive calendar days as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE
DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor
fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the
Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be
discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the
Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee
SectionIII Page 44 of 45 11/17/2008
1
Section III - General Conditions
Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the
Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars
($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment.
The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage '
to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of
final acceptance.
Sectionlll Page 45 of 45
11/17/2009
i SECTION lll=A
i
? SUPPLEMENTARY
? GENERAL
? CONDITIONS
i
i
i
SECTION IIIa
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
General Conditions of the Construction Contract are a part of this contract.
The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the General Conditions of the
Construction Contract. Where any article of the General Conditions is modified or any
paragraph, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the
unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect.
MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION III
2.0 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS
' 2.3 COMMENCMENT OF CONTRACT TIME; NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING
THE PROJECT
' 2.3.1 The work required in the Contract for Pump Station 41 Rehabilitation shall. be
substantially complete no later than 160 calendar days after the date when the Contract
' Time commences to run.
2.3.2 Substantial completion is defined as having all components installed and ready for
daily operation. Substantial completion includes start-up, operation, testing,
manufacturers checks and services, operator training, and similar items. The following
items need not be completed for Substantial Completion:
a. Finish paving
b. Final clean-up and restoration
i c. Final application for payment and final acceptance
' 2.3.3 All work in the Contract shall be completed and ready for final payment within
180 calendar days after the date when the Contract Time commences to run.
5.0 - BONDS AND INSURANCE
' 5.2 Insurance: Include as an additional insured the Owner's Engineering Consultant:
Cardno TBE
' 380 Park Place Boulevard, Suite 300
Clearwater, Florida 33759
' TBE Groun. Inc. SuDDlementarv General Conditions
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20IO\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\Sectionllla.docSection Ilia-I Feb,
,
6.0 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILI
TIES
6.8 PERMITS '
6.8.1 The Contractor shall be required to pay all connection and impact fees. ,
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ,
6.9.1 The Contractor shall provide the City with a Hurricane Preparation Plan.
14.0 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
1
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
,
14. 1.1 The City shall provide a disk with the Pay Application Format to the
Contractor at the Preconstruction Meeting.
1
TBE Grou Inc. Su lementa General Conditions
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSMILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\SectionIIIa.docSection IIIa-2 Febmai
I
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
1
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1
Table of Contents:
1 SCOPE OF WORK .......................................................................................................... .1
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ..................................................................
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST ........................................:. ........................ . 2
2 FIELD ENGINEERING ...........................................................................................:..... . 3
2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR .............. . 3
2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS ............................................................................ . 3
2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA ...................................................................................................... . 4
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ................................ . 4
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS .............................................................................................. . 4
3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS ........................................................................................ . 4
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS .......................................................................... . 4
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ................................................................ 6
5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK .......................................................... 6
6 CONCRETE ......................................................................................................................7
7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK .......................................... 7
7.1 EXCAVATION ............................................................................................................... . 7
7.2 FORMS .......................................................................................................................... . 7
8 REINFORCEMENT ............................................................................. ........................7
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT .................................................................................................. . 8
9 OBSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................................................. $
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS
AND STREET PAVEMENT ............................................................................................ 8
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS .................................................................. 9
12 DEWATERING .................................................................................................................9
12.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... .9
12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 10
12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL ................................................................................... 10
12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND
WATER FROMANYNON-CONTAMINATED SITEACTIVITY ........................... 10
13 SANITARY MANHOLES .............................................................................................. 12
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE .......................................................................................................... 12
13.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 13
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ........................................ 13
13.3 DROP MANHOLES ..................................................................................................... 13
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ............................................................................................ 14
SectionIV i 10/13/2 008
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS .............................................................................................. 14
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ............................................................................. 14
14 BACKFILL ..........................................................:...........................................................14
15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC ........................................................................................14
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................15
16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 15
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL .....................................................................15
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 15
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 15
UNDERDRAINS .............................................................................................................15
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 16
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 16
STORM SEWERS ..........................................................................................................16
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 16
19.2 TESTING ...................................................................................................................... 16
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 17
SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS ..............................................................17
20.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 17
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 17
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE .................................:........................................................... 17
20.2 INSTALLATION ...............................................................................................:.......... 18
20.2.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 18
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 18
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................... 18
20.4 TESTING ......................................................................................................................18
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS ........................................................................ 18
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS ..................................................................... •........ 19
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT ....................................:............................................................ 19
20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 19
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 19
DRAINAGE ................................................................................................... ..............19
ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE ..........................................................................19
22.1 BASE ............................................................................................................................ 19
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ................... 21
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ............................... 21
22.2 SUBGRADE ................................................................................................................. 21
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ................................................................................ 22
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................ 22
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ................................................................... 22
18
19
20
21
22
23
SectionIV
ii
10/13/2008 1
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................................................................... 22
23.1.1 AGGREGATE ........................................................................................................ 22
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS ................................................................................. 22
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT &
QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................ 22
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES .................................................................... 23
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ............................... 23
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 24
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION .............................................................. 24
23.61 CRACKS .............................................................:.................................................. 24
23.62 POTHOLES ........................................................................................................... 25
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES ............................................................................... 25
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 25
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE .................................................................... 26
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 26
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 27
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 27
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 27
25.1 IRRIGATION ................................................................................................................ 27
25. 1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 27
25.1.2 PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 29
25.1.3 EXECUTION ......................................................................................................... 33
25.2 LANDSCAPE ...................................:........................................................................... 36
25.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 36
25.2.2 PRODUCTS ..............................................................•........................................... 41
25.2.3 EXECUTION ........................................................................................................ 44
26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ................................................... 51
26.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................ 51
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 51
26.3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 51
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 52
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 52
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION ......................................................................................:...... 53
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 53
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 53
26.9 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................... 53
27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS ........................................................................................... 53
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 54
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 54
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................ 54
29 CONCRETE CURBS ..................................................................................................... 54
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 54
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 54
SectionN iii 10/13/2008
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS ......................................................... 54
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS .......................................................................................... 54
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS ...............:...........
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 55
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 55
31 SODDING ........................................................................................................................ 55
32 SEEDING ......................................................................................................................... 56
33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM
STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 56
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 56
33.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 57
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 57
34 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 57
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 57
36 STREET SIGNS .............................................................................................................. 57
37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................. 57
37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ................................ 57
37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ................................................... 57
37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ....................................................................... 58
37.4 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 58
37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO ...................................................................... 58
37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ....................................................................... 58
37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION ............................................................................................ 58
37.8 LIGHTING ................................................................................................................... 59
37.9. SPEED OF TRAVEL .................................................................................................... 59
37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX ................................................................................................... 59
37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE ............................................................................................... 59
37-12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ................................................................................... 59
38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 59
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 59
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................. 60
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS .................................... 60
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES ........................................................................ 60
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ....................................................................................... 60
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ...................... 60
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS .................................................................... 61
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ....................................................... 61
38.9 MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................... 61
38.10 COMPLIANCE ............................................................................................................. 61
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING ................................................................. 64
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................... 64
SectionIV
iv
10/13/2008 1
41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND
APPURTENANCES ....................................................................................................... 64
41.1 SCOPE .............................................................................................•............................ 64
41.2' MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 65
41.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 65
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALSANDFITTINGS ..................................................................... 65
41,23 GATE VALVES ...................................................................................................... 67
41.2.4 VALVE BOXES ..................•................................................................................... 67
41.2.5 HYDRANTS ........................................................................................................... 68
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES ............................................................................................. 69
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS .................................................................. 69
41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ................................................................................ 69
41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES ............................................................................................. 70
41 2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS ...................................................................................... 70
41.3 CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................ 70
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING ....................................................................................... 70
41.3.2 PIPE LAYING ....................................................................................................... 70
41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS ......................................... 72
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ............................................................... 72
41.4 TESTS ........................................................................................................................... 73
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS ......................................................................................... 73
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST ................................................................................................ 73
41.5 STERILIZATION ......................................................................................................... 73
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT .......................................................................................... 73
41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 73
41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCED URE .......................................................................... 73
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS ............................................................................ 74
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS ................................................................ 74
41.6. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ........................................................................... 74
41.61 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 74
41.62 FURNISHAND INSTALL WATER MAINS ........................................................... 75
41.63 FURNISHAND INSTALL FITTINGS ................................................................... 75
CO VER S ................................................................................................................ 75
41.6.5 FURNISHAND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS ....................................................... 75
42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 76
43 TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................................... 76
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................... 76
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS ............................................................................................. 76
43.1.2 BASE COURSE ..................................................................................................... 76
43.1.3 PRIME COAT ....................................................................................................... 76
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE ............................................................................................ 76
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE ............................................................................................. 76
43.1.6 COLOR COAT ...................................................................................................... 77
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS ............................................................................................ 78
SectionIV v 10/13/2008
1
43.2.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................... .. 78
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION .......................................................................................... .. 79
43.2.3 SLOPE ................................................................................................................. ..79
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................... .. 80
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING ..................................................................................... .. 80
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE ........................................................................................... .. 80
43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER ................................................................................................. .. 80
43.2.8 FENCING ..................... :..................................................................................... .. 81
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS .................................................................................................. ..81
43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................ .. 81
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE ......................................................................................... .. 83
43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) ................................................................................ .. 83
43.2.13 CONCRETE ........................................................................................................ ..83
43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING ............................................... .. 83
43.2.15 WATER COOLER ................................................................................................ .. 84
43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION ............................................................................................ ..84
43.2.17 WARRANTY ......................................................................................................... ..84
WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 85
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ....... .. 85
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ............................................................ .. 85
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY ....................................................................................... .. 85
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES ..................................................................... .. 86
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS ................................................................................................. .. 86
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS ............... .. 86
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS ....................................................... .. 86
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS ........................................................................................... .. 86
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ................................. .. 86
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION .................. .. 87
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ..................... 87
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR.......... .. 87
CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING ............................................................................ .. 87
45.1 INTENT ...................................................................................................................... .. 87
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ...................... .. 88
45.3 MATERIALS .............................................................................................................. .. 88
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................. .. 88
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ..................................................................................... .. 89
45.6 LINER INSTALLATION ..............................
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ................................................................................... .. 89
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................... .. 89
45.9 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................. .. 89
SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING ................................... .. 90
46.1 MATERIALS .............................................................................................................. .. 90
461.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS ......................................................................................... .. 90
461.2 QUALITYCONTROL ......................................................................................... .. 90
44
45
46
SectionIV
vi
10/13/2008 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
46.1.3 SAMPLES .............................................................................................................. 90
461.4 REJECTION .......................................................................................................... 90
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS ..................................................................................................... 90
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ................................................................................. 91
463.1 HANDLING OF PIPE ........................................................................................... 91
463.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS .................................................................... 91
463.3 PIPE JOINING ..................................................................................................... 91
463.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE ............................................................................. 91
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE ........................................................................................ 91
464.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS ...................................................... 91
464.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION ........................................................................... 91
464.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS .......................................................... 92
464.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER ................................................................................ 92
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ...................................................................... 92
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED ................................................ 92
464.7 BACKFILLING ..........................................................................:.......................... 93
464.8 POINT REPAIR ..................................................................................................... 93
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS ................................................................................... 93
SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE ...................... 93
47.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... 93
47.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 93
47.3 PIPE .............................................................................................................................. 93
47.4 JOINING SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 94
47.5 FITTINGS ..................................................................................................................... 94
GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 94
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ................................................................................ 94
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE ................. 94
48.3 COMPOSITION ........................................................................................................... 94
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 95
48.5 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 95
48.6 WATER ......................................................................................................................... 95
48.7 REINFORCEMENT ..................................................................................................... 95
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 95
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ......................................................................................... 96
48.10 PROPORTIONING ....................................................................................................... 96
48.11 MIXING ........................................................................................................................ 96
48.12 APPLICATION ............................................................................................................. 96
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ......................................................................................... 97
48.14 SURFACE FINISH ....................................................................................................... 97
48.15 CURING ....................................................................................................................... 97
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ..................................................................... 97
48.17 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................... 98
48.18 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 7
$
98
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION ........................... 99
SectionIV vii 10/13/2008
1
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT ................................................................................................. 99
49.2 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................. .. 99
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS ..................................
........................................
..
99
49.3.1 MATERIALS ......................................................................................................... .99
49.3.2 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION .................................................................. 100
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .............................................. 100
49.4.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 101
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL ................................:..................................................... 101
49.6 GROUTING MIX ....................................................................................................... 101
49.7 LINER MIX ....................................................................:........................................... 101
49.8 WATER ...................................................................................................................•--- 102
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 102
49.10 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 102
49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ....................................................................... 102
49.11.1 PREPARATION ................................................................................................... 102
49.11.2 MLYING ............................................................................................................... 103
49.11.3 SPRAYING .......................................................................................................... 103
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING ......................................................................................... 103
49.11.5 CURING .............................................................................................................. 103
.49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ...................................................... 104
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... 104
49.12.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................ 104
49.12.2 MATERIALS ............................................... . . ....................................................... 104
49.12.3 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION .................................................................. 106
PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS .......................................................................... 108
IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM ............................................................ 108
51.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ 108
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ..................................................................................... 109
51.2.1 ASPHALT ............................................................................................................ 109
51.2.2 CONCRETE ........................................................................................................ 109
51.2.3 COURTPATCH BINDER MIX ........................................................................... 109
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT ......................................................... 109
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE .......................................................... .110
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION .....................................................................................110
51.6 PLAYING LINES ....................................................................................................... .110
51.7 GENERAL .................................................................................................................. .110
51.8 LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................................ .110
RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ..........................111
GABIONS AND MATTRESSES ..................................................................................111
53.1 MATERIAL ................................................................................................................ .111
53.1.1 GABIONAND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL ................................................... 111
53.1.2 GABIONAND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: ............................................... 113
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE ................................................................................................ 114
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC ........................................................................................ 114
50
51
52
53
SectionIV
viii
10/13/2008 1
1
53.2 PERFORMANCE ..............................................114
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................... 115
54.1
54.2 SCOPE .........................................................................................................................
SCHEDULING OF WORK ......................................................................................... 115
115
54.3 WORK METHODS .....................................•............................................................... 116
' 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING .......................................................................
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT ............................................................................ 116
116
54.4 LITTER ........................................................................................................................ 116
' 54.5
54.6 VISUAL CHECK.. ......................................................... i ............................................
PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING ........................................................... H6
116
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)...... 116
' 54.8
54.9 DEBRIS REMOVAL ............................................................. ..................................... ?
TRAFFIC CONTROL . . 11 b
117
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY ............................................................................................. 117
54.11
54.12 PLANT FERTILIZATION ...........................................................................................
WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA .......................................................... 117
117
54.13 MULCH CONDITION ................................................................................................ 117
' 54.14
54.15 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR ..................................................................
LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ...................................................•.. 117
117
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION ............................................................................................. 117
' 54.17
54.18 FREEZE PROTECTION .....................................................•.......................................
LEVEL OF SERVICE .................................................................................................. 118
118
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ........................................................................................ 118
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL ............................................................................... 118
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................................ 118
55 MILLING OPERATIONS ..................................................................................:.........
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE ....................................... 119
119
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS .................................
. .......................... 119
' 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS ........................................................................ 120
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ......................................... . . ....... . 120
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES .................. 120
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................ 120
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING ................................................................................................ 120
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS .............................................................................. 121
' 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 121
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 121
' 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ...................................................................................
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 121
121
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 121
57 RIPRAP ......................................................................................................................... 121
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 121
' 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 122
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ................................................................................ 122
1 SectionlV ix 10/13/2008
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL ............................................................................................. 122
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ................................................................ 122
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ........................................... 122
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 123
60 SIGNING AND MARKING ......................................................................................... 123
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 123
61 ROADWAY LIGHTING .............................................................................................. 123
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 123
62 TREE PROTECTION .................................................................................................. 124
62.1 TREE BARRICADES ................................................................................................ 124
62.2 ROOT PRUNING ....................................................................................................... 124
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING ........................................................................................ 125
63 PROJECT WEB PAGES .............................................................................................. 126
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN ............................................................................................... 126
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ..................................................................... 126
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... 126
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ........................................................................................... 127
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS ............................................................................................ 127
63.6 POSTING .................................................................................................................... 127
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES ............................................................................................ 127
SectionIV
x
10/13/2008 '
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Section CV - Technical Specifications
1 SCOPE OF WORK
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION
Project Name: Pump Station 41 Rehabilitation
Project Number: 07-0009-UT
Scope of Work:
The work consists of furnishing and installing all labor and equipment to rehabilitate Pump
Station 41 as shown on the plans and described in the Contract Documents. This includes all by-
pass pumping and piping, new pumps, controls, valve vault, piping, restoration, traffic control,
and all other appurtenances to make a complete and operational Pump Station 41.
The Contractor shall provide 1 fixed project signs as described in SECTION 111, ARTICLE 23 of
the Contract Documents.
CONTRACT PERIOD: 180 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS
SectionIV Page 1 of 127 10/13/2008
Section 1V -- Technical Specifications
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST
Project Name: Pump Station 41 Rehabilitation
Project Number: 07-0009-UT
The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X"
as shown below:
1 ® Scope Of Work
2.1 Line and Grade Shall Be Performed B The Contractor
2.2 ? Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City
3 Definition Of Terms
4 ® Order And Location Of The Work
5 ® Excavation For Under ound Work
6 Concrete
7 ® Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work
8 ® Reinforcement
9 Obstructions
10 ® Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement
11 Work In Easements Or Parkways
12 Dewatering
13 ® Sanitary Manholes
14 Backfill
15 Street Crossings, Etc.
16 ? Raisin Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures
17 Unsuitable Material Removal
18 Underdrains
19 Storm Sewers
20 Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains
21 Drainage
22 ? Roadway Base And Subgrade
23 Asphaltic Concrete Materials
24 ? Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt
25 ? General Planting Specifications
26 El I Hd a Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining
27 ? Plant Mix Driveways
28 Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials
29 Concrete Curbs
30 ® Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways
31 ® Sodding
32 ? Seeding
33 ? Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures
34 Material Used
35 Conflict Between Plans And Specifications
36 ? Street Signs
37 AudioNideo Recording Of Work Areas
38 Erosion And Siltation Control
39 Utility Tie In Location Marking
SectionlV Page 2 of 127 10/13/200$
1
1
1
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
40 ® Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee
41 ? Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances
42 ? Gas System Specifications
43 Tennis Courts
44 ® Work Zone Traffic Control
45 Cured-In-Place Pi2e Lining
46 Specifications for Polyethylene Sli lining
47 Specifications. for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe
48 ? Gunite Specifications
49 ? Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration
50 ® Project Information Sips
T In-Line Skating Surfacing System
2- Resident Notification of Start of Construction
53 Gabions and Mattresses
54 ? Lawn Maintenance Specifications
55 ? Milling Operations
56 Clearing and Grubbing
57 Ri ra
58 ? Treatment Plant Safety
59 ? Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials
60 ? Signing And Marking
61 ? Roadway Lighting
62 Tree Protection
63 ? Project Web Pages
2 FIELD ENGINEERING
2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE
CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such
work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site
improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the
work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the
Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals
under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As-
built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III
(General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents.
2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS
' Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the
Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and
shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any
permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or
disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the
1
SectionIV Page 3 of 127
10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land
Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida.
2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA
The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the
Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing
locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record
drawings for the project.
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY
At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project
inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project.
Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and
grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer,. will be charged to the Contractor at the
rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be
computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the
project Record construction drawings.
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III,
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply.
For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that
the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a
basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not
assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated
quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate
of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations
pertaining thereto.
3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of
local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard
adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise.
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows:
AA Aluminum Association, Inc.
AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AMA Acoustical Materials Association
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
SectionIV Page 4 of 127 10/13/2008
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SectionTV
Section IV -Technical Specifications
APA American Plywood Association
ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWG American Wire Gauge
AWMA Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CS Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards
DEP Department of Environmental Protection (Florida)
DOT Department of Transportation (Florida)
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
FAC Florida Administrative Code
FBC Florida Building Code
FFPC Florida Fire Prevention. Code
FGC Florida Gas Code
FMC Florida Mechanical Code
FPC Florida Plumbing Code
FedSpec Federal Specifications
HI Standards of Hydraulic Institute
IBBM Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IPS Iron Pipe Size
MIL Military Specification
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NPT National Pipe Thread
NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association
PCA Portland Cement Association
PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
SBC Standard Building Code (SBCCI)
SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
SDI Steel Door Institute
SFPC Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI)
SGC Standard Gas Code (SBCCI)
SH Steel Joist Institute
SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National
Association
Page 5 of 127
10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI)
SPC
Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) '
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
TCA
Title Council of America ,
UL Underwriters' Laboratories
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK '
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 - ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE
WORK.
5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK
The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner
which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times
maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property.
The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements
of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in
these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory
agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor.
For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to
consider all excavation to be done in the. performance of this contract to be in soil classified as
OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for
excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the
removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of
a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent
Person to City staff at the start of construction.
City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or
other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with
the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with
these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's
excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is
unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must
either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the
accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense.
The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain
sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open
cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to
OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the
Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all
safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work
necessary to complete the project.
Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the
completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance
specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than
the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid
SectionIV Page 6 of 127 10/13/2008
1
1J
1 Section IV - Technical Specifications
' in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the
body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place,
excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling
' and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without
compensation.
6 CONCRETE
Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest
editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the
' American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall
be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials.
' Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum
compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall
conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete
' shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except
when admixtures or special placement considerations are required.
' The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
concrete placement.
All concrete shall be tested in the following manner:
1
Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise,
for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3
compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion
of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as
determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and
compensation or denial thereof.
7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK
7.1 EXCAVATION
Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon
which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a
point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the
dry It
7,2 FORMS
Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by
written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth
equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall
be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or
springing.
8 REINFORCEMENT
When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be
deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel
A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the
SectionIV Page 7 of 127 10/13/2008
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM Al 85). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated
reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements.
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the
contract unit price for the item of work specified.
9 OBSTRUCTIONS
Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be
carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and
properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof.
Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains,
or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims
for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made.
Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or
obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or
benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless
otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land
surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the
nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means.
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS,
CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET, PAVEMENT
Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and
shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards,
whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be
replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is
unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved
material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as
base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T-
180.
Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor,
materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or
square yard of base.
The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals,
shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid
for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of
replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the
pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense.
The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in
the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and
shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard:
concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot.
SectionIV Page 8 of 127 10/13/2008
1
11
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10
welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work.
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS
Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the
construction progress.
The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time
following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration
within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction
activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests.
Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery
removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work.
The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on
any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local
residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission.
Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater
treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for
Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre-
construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory
requirements.
12 DEWATERING
' 12.1 GENERAL
Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the
' dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the
work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity
underdrain system, or sumps with pumps.
' Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the
excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain
firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and
the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of
handling large volumes of air as well as of water.
' The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering
operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work,
the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in
' excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to
conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer.
' The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures.
' SectionIV Page 9 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS '
12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL
The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for '
the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to
dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways.
Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must ,
collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The
following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... '
12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED
GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE '
ACTIVITY
City_ Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental
De
artment with th
f
ll
i
i
f
ti
i
t
b
i
i
d
i
i
i
i ,
p
e
o
ow
ng
n
orma
on pr
or
o
eg
nn
ng
ewater
ng act
v
t
es:
1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results
2) A copy of the FDEP Notification ,
Failure to follow the above procedure will result in a Violation and a Stop Work Order will be
placed on the project. '
Depending on the severity of the Violation, the City's Engineering Department may be required
to notify the Department of Environmental Protection for enforcement action.
Th
f
ll
i
ill b
f
ll
d
'
e
o
ow
ng procedure w
e
o
owe
:
1 st occurrence - Stop Work Order
2nd occurrence - Notification to FDEP '
It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have
any questions. You may contact the City at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance. '
STATE OF FLORIDA
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER '
FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY
The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site
activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- '
620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the
listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites,
analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to '
determine if contamination exists.
Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be '
sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement
of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued
coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit '
SectionIV Page 10 of 127 10/13/2008
1
n
Section IV - Technical Specifications
shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be
sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1.
TABLE 1
Screening Values for Discharges into:
Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters
Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/1 10.0 mg/1
PH, standard units 6.0-8.5 6.5-8.5
Total Recoverable Mercury - by Method 1631 E 0.012 µg/1 0.025 µg/1
Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg/1 9.3 µg/1
Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg/1 2.9 µg/1
Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/1 5.6 µg/1
Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg/1 86.0 µg/1
Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg/1 50.0 9g/1
Benzene 1.0 µg/1 1.0 µg/1
Naphthalene 100.0 µg/1 100.0 µg/1
If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the
discharge is not authorized by this permit or b the City o Clearwater.
Section1V
(a) For initial. TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which
may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic
compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC
requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional
information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the
method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The
Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates
that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight
organic compounds.
(b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty
(30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information:
1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued
to;
2. the name and address of the facility, including county location;
3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s);
4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and
longitude);
Page 11 of 127
10/1 3/200R
'
Section IV - Technical Specifications
5. the name of the receiving water; and
6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. '
(c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the
Department. '
For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0
units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless
the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of '
this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units
for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural
background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal '
waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units,
the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural '
background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH
of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this
permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration ,
of less than 1500 mg/l, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or
greater than 1500 mg/l.
In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(1)(a-c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from '
floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on
surface waters.
If
i
i
'
contam
nat
on exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph
(2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an
individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface '
waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other
applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit.
If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any '
source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having
to submit an NOI request for coverage to.the Department. A short summary of the proposed
activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office
'
within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during
discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge
Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. '
All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic
Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit. '
13 SANITARY MANHOLES
'
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the
drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to '
inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of
as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and ,
evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into
concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full
section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. '
SectionIV Page 12 of 127 10/13/2008
11
Section IV - Technical Specifications
The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed
twenty four inches.
Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick used may be solid only. Brick. shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a
stretcher course.
13.2 PRECAST TYPE
Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the
City Engineer.
AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5
inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be
a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum
concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days.
Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for
' approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance
to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by
the City Engineer.
' Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as
numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before
being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering
system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered.
1
Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of
Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of 3.
Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings
are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed.
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5)
inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)
Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring
shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade
changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 - Asphaltic Concrete -
Adjustment of Manholes.
13.3 DROP MANHOLES
Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as
detailed on the drawings.
SectionIV Page 13 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications '
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ,
Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush
with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301.
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS ,
The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II ,
Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type lI Class I) as
manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which
have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have '
the inside plastered with 1/2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below.
The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry
thickness of Type IT Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 '
Type Il Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite.
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES '
Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a
manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. '
14 BACKFILL
Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources '
as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or
debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all
fill shall be similar material. '
Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand
shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. '
Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness
unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98%
compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. '
Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a
minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. 1
The cost of Backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. '
15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC.
At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be '
bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon
the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The
material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be '
satisfactory to the Engineer.
The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. '
SectionIV Page 14 of 127 10/13/2008
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
' 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STORM
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans
' or as indicated by the Engineer.
' 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
' 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL
All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the
site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off-
site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall either be shown on the plans, or determined
in the field by the Engineer in conjunction with the City's Materials Tester.
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated
' and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation,
truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal.
' 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment,
' tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable
material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item.
' 18 UNDERDRAINS
The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of
' Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe
shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate,. located behind the back of curb and
' aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate
may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be
stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8"
' diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification
For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of
46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189
' described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 -
SDR 35.
' Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe
exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C,
manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of
' splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60%
flatting and with a double gasket joint.
Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe
with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure
SectionlV Page 15 of 127 10/13/2008
'
Section IV - Technical Specifications
to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall
be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain '
aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved
equal) per the construction detail drawings. ,
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted. '
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, '
which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and
shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain
(specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway, '
road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item.
19 STORM SEWERS
All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless
otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941 '
of the current FDOT Specifications.
All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent '
(as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit
price for the pipe.
All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty '
is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street
before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No
pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and '
not simply wedged up. Before finishing each point, some suitable device is to be used to find that
the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout.
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, '
inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream
manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole
cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) '
19.2 TESTING
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all '
conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer
which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. ,
The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by
filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the
crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, '
whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or
exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish
all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the '
SectionlV Page 16 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own
expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer,
remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No
trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be
acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
' line.
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
' Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted,
measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of
' storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price
includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap,
labor and incidentals, etc.).
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
' 20.1 MATERIALS
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
' GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON.
Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R.
' 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly
marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber
sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying
' length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20-feet.
Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and
fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP
' water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline
easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral
' connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets
shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41.
A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line.
' 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
' FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless
otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile
iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications
' for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures
recommendations.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet
' radiation shall be rejected.
SectionIV Page 17 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
20.2 INSTALLATION
20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained
in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5.
The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable
width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12-inch on each side) allowing working space to place and
compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be
performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted
haunching material or pipe alignment.
Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow
preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench.without
standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to
prevent flotation or misalignment.
Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to
remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm
support of pipe.
Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an
approved water stop around pipe joint entry.
The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is
required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction
inspector the location of all new laterals.
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical
Specifications for water main pipe.
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings
describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from
the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings
will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main
pipes in manholes.
20.4 TESTING
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all
conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level
may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying
above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a
hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test
section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the
exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter
SectionIV Page 18 of 127 10/13/2008
1
1 Section IV - Technical Specifications
per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the
amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or
exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to
remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire
' length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after
they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The
' Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of
bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4-
inches shall be cause for rejection.
' The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS
Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as
' described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains.
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT
' 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per
' appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for
payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes.
' Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline
of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the
property line.
' Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete
the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering,
backfill and grading.
' 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
' Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of
these Technical Specifications for water main pipe.
' 21 DRAINAGE
The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the
' progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them.
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE
' 22.1 BASE
This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall
' refer to Section 1V, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional
roadway base and subgrade items.
3ectionIV Page 19 of 127 10/13/2008
i
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or
directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a
minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor
and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing
laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the
limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
Specifications will apply.
Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs
required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done
to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can
commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material
shall be included in the bid item for base.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base
and subgrade placement or reworking.
The following base materials are acceptable:
1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted
thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the
prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base.
2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections
200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a
minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a
FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item
price for base.
3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in
accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition),
and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed
concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified
laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms
to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation
tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous
operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City
Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price
for base.
4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed
in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have
a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane
Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise
noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with
asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for
the work.
SectionIV Page 20 of 127
1
10/13/2008
1
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered
Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design
shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall
be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer.
The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use
of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement
shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests
(i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be
at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil
cement design.
5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with
' Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum
compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and
compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in
' the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item
price for asphalt or base.
6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the
finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless
otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in
accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The
density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements
are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
' Specifications.
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
' The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as
called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas
' deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if
so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be
made for such deficient areas that are left in place.
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
' The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item),
stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt
unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
' 22.2 SUBGRADE
All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of
FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall
' have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by
the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of
' the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
SectionIV Page 21 of 127 10/13/2005
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in
accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing,
grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to
prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or
subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value
after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade.
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place
and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth
shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values
shall be per FDOT Section 160-7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be
corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the
City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas
that are left in place (latest edition).
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in
the bid item for base.
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS
This specification is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design
asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted.
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
23.1.1 AGGREGATE
All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections
901 through 919 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS,
EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE
The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous
materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications
(latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance
procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing
laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all
materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons
SectionIV Page 22 of 127 10/13/2008
1
1
1
1
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to
determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along
with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable
specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and
' accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent
testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract
documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of
removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the
Contractor.
Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following_
' 1. Density per Section 330-11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
' 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of '/" or greater shall be
' corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness
for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the
Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of/" or greater, the Engineer will
determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the
pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness
t specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall notify- the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
' placement of all asphalt.
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES
' All asphalt mix designs' shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's
2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR
to the commencement of the paving operation. NO RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT
' (RAP) MATERIAL SHALL BE ALLOWED IN THE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXES.
23.4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS
' All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements:
Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction)
COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches)
THICKNESS
(Inches)
Type S-I
Type S-1 with
Type S-III
Top Layer
Type S-11I
FC-3
Type S-III
with FC-3
Top Layer
Type S-I
with FC-3
Top Layer
1 st 2nd 1 st 2' 1 st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 st 2nd
1 1 1
1 %Z 1'/2
SectionIV
Page 23 of 127
10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
2 1'/ 3/ * 1 1
2'/Z 1'/ 1'/ 1'/2 1 1'/2 1
3 1'/a 1 %z 2 1 2 1
* At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets
Additional Notes:
1. Type S-III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only).
2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement
design detail.
5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S-III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed
limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000,
and all residential streets.
6. An FC-3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall
be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of
3000 or greater.
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of
operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture,
surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with
Section 330 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION
23.6.1 CRACKS
Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by
the following steps:
1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method.
2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as
appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the
level of the surrounding roadway surface.
3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks
are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking.
4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
SectionIV Page 24 of 127
7
10/13/2008
1-1
rl
F
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
23.6.2 POTHOLES
Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps:
1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method.
2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole.
3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted.
4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall
be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each
item.
The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions:
The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements.
The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum
requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel
adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or
fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per
manufacturers specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each
riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring
section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original
casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that
the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are
thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each
riser.
If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of
pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and
compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is
acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable.
All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final
asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving
operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On
arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period
between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve
boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be
included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure
that they are not paved over, It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all
utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the
scheduled paving.
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS
1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item
for asphalt.
SectionlV Page 25 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the
road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans.
3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely
manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements.
4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom
Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas
shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that
picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water
supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off
of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site.
5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's
discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost
(including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the
plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be '/" above the lip
or face of said curb per City Index 101.
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in
Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic
concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition).
2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to
Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise
specified in the Scope of Work.
4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and
accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used.
SectionIV Page 26 of 127 10/13/2008
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
' 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and
measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack
' and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching,
filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and
' specifications.
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT
1 When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in
accordance with the following provisions:
' 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price
Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening.
' 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT
shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet
site. The address is: http://wwwl l.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business
' with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For
additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000.
' 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be
used for the initial determination of the asphalt price.
4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt
will be used for payment calculation.
5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period
for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index.
6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat.
7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made
for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time.
8. The City rescrvcs the right to make adjustmcnts for decrcases in the cost of asphalt.
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
25.1 IRRIGATION
25.1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic
underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials,
equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the
underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or
specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay
item.
B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the
turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be
SectionIV Page 27 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of
the Engineer.
25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation
subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope,
mainline, system pressure, controls, etc.
B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all
applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work
shall apply.
C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with
the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject
material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall
be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the
Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of
three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information:
1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour
emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and
address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where
replacement equipment can be purchased.
2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract.
3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and
"hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the
Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.
a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and
maintenance.
b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and
maintenance.
25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground
improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting
requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of
main lines.
B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials.
C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until
final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen,
or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the
contractor.
D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to
the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be
SectionlV Page 28 of 127 10/13/2008
' Section 1V - Technical Specifications
' responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to
comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the
public.
' 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory
' service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City
of Clearwater.. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or
faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT.
25.1.2 PRODUCTS
1
1
25.1.2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations
. from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted.
25.1.2.2 PIPING
A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and
tested in accordance with these specifications.
B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40,
conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785.
C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the
mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80.
25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS
A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform. to
the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or
trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval.
The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with
threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples.
25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER
A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as
recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end.
B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The
Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe.
25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant.
25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES
25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
SectionIV Page 29 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve
2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals
3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors
4. Non-Shock Safe-T Shear Stem
5. Safe-T-Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal.
25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2%" IN. AND LARGER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. AWWA-C-509
2. 200 lb. O. W G
3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B
4. Deep socket joints
5. Rising stem
6. Bolted bonnet
7. Double disc
8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle
B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5'
long with a 2" square operating nut.
25.1.2.7 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater)
25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the
diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a
pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating
shall not be less than 150 psi.
B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic,
stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece
diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice.
C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip
inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections.
D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable
from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California, or approved equal.
F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings.
SectionIV Page 30 of 127 10/13/20OR
1
1
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES
A. For remote control drip valve assembly and LTNIK control timer use a Brooks #36
concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal.
B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION
25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear
polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning,
integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be
brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside
diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded
to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers
shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-
flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper.
25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION
A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet
pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and
with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating
pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9
gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure
compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The
drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be
available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified.
Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum
system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius
shall be 7".
B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be
installed 3'-5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction.
25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES
A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each
independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning
of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect
directly to the dripline.
25.1.2.10.4 AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an AirNacuum Relief Valve at its high
point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi.
SectionIV Page 31 of 127 10/13/2009
1
Section .1V - Technical Specifications
25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds
per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating
accuracy shall be within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high-
impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed
stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the
water passage.
25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS
A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial
size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be
constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance.
25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS
A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings
and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the
integrity of the subsurface irrigation system.
25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER
A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate
transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from
the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type
which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function
normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall
function if submerged in water.
B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to
insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for
screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box.
C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless
of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either
sequentially or independently.
D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station
run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a
seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed
on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to
the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of
manual single station or manual program operation.
E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California USA.
25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER
A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field
Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an
infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS
SectioniV Page 32 of 127 10/13/2008
1
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
' plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall
operate on one 9V alkaline battery.
B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad.
' A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after
one minute when not in use.
' C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK
Control Modules.
D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
' Glendora, California USA.
25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID
1
A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing
installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFB series
valve.
B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.3 EXECUTION
25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general
details of the work.
B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced.
C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary
shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed,
except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor
in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given
to the Contractor.
D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits' and all inspections required by
outside authorities.
E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically
mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions.
F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific
interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or
clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the
decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall
be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost.
G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of
sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other
underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract
Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the
manner by which it relates to the installation.
Section1v Page 213 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that
obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or
specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer.
1. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving
prior to roadway base.
25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL
A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches.
Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on
Drawings.
B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all
lines of other trades.
C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind.
D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45
degrees to 90 degrees.
E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities.
25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING
A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe.
B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter
larger than %2 in.
C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition.
D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil.
E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs.
F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per
AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed
95% of maximum density.
G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand
tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more
than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall
have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to
prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities.
25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING:
A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on
Drawings.
B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines.
1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations.
2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated.
SectionfV Page 34 of 127 10/13/2008
'
Section IV - Technical Specifications
C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure
' supply line.
D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between
' site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original
Drawings, and without additional cost.
E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of
approved layout.
' 25.1.3 .3 INSTALLATION
25.1.3 .3.1 WATER SUPPLY
A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the
' Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost
to the Owner.
' 25
1
3 2 ASSEMBLIES
3
.
. .
.
A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install
' lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings.
B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own
' outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly.
C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical
Special Provisions.
' D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the
male threads only.
' 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER)
A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway,
utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE
' A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent.
' 1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling.
2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water
pressure is on.
3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for
solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent
f
t
manu
ac
urer.
C. Curing
1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24
hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure.
' D. Flushing the system:
SectionIV Page 35 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control
valves and flush out the system with a full head of water.
E. Installing piping under existing pavement:
1. Piping under existing pavement maybe installed by jacking & boring.
2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing
pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be
accomplished at no additional cost.
25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS
A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans.
1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior
to installation.
25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the
top of the valve to finish grade.
B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other
equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer
than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways.
C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for
each sprinkler zone.
25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES
A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper
maintenance.
B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill.
25.2 LANDSCAPE
25.2.1 GENERAL
25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal,
Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and
Special Conditions when required.
25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory
agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and
environmental matters.
B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the
contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having
SectionIV Page 36 of 127 10/13/2009
u
Section IV - Technical Specifications
jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the
Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to
the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and
incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans,
Schedules, Notes and as specified herein.
B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to
prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish
grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish,
plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to
execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans.
C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to
prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will
appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the
landscape drawings.
' D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document.
25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who
shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors
under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work,
' shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their
commencement of work on the project.
1
1
B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices.
C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these. Plans is provided only for the
Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the
Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate
and be considered the controlling document.
D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining. safety among
persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety.
and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape
Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting
from compliance or non-compliance with these standards.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is
built into or affects the work in this Section.
F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to
excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770.
G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the
work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in
conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect.
SectionlV Page 37 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance
period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established
by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year.
B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all
specified work.
25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor
must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/altemates at the time of
bidding.
B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of
the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void.
C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any
substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without
approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk.
D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions
and warranties stated herein.
25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS
O.A. or HT.:
The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of
the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
CT:
C W.:
SPR..
ST. TR.:
MIN.:
GAL.:
O. C.:
Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with
no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or
similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds.
Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf
sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms
or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the
fronds.
Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not
including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
Straight trunk.
Minimum.
Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc.
On center, distance between plant centers.
SectionIV Page 38 of 127
11
1
1
1
1
10/13/2008
1
' DIA.:
Diameter.
LVS.:
Leaves.
Section IV - Technical Specifications
D.B.H.:
Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above
grade.
CAL.:
' Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade,
larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade.
B&B:
Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American
Association of Nurserymen.
PPP:
Plants per pot.
' FG:
Field grown.
STD.:
' Standard, single, straight trunk.
Owner:
To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work
is performed.
Owner's Representative:
' Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of
materials specified and execution of installation.
Contractor:
' Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor.
Landscape Architect: .
This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the
landscape Plans and Specifications.
' 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS
' A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune
prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark,
break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If
plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered.
B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected
' from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have
been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be
pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time.
Seotion[V Page 39 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than
1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less
than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall
have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch.
D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root
pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at
the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except
plastic shrink wrap for transport only.
E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches
of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a
minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling.
Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be
removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of
delivery.
F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting is delayed more than b hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs
in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots
moist.
G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof
tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after
stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing
in a shaded area.
25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS
25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS.
A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions
under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project
Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions, prior to beginning work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of
conditions and full responsibility for the completed work.
B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and
following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape
Architect for adjustments to the Schedule.
C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting
procedures.
D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage
conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing
prior to planting.
E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns,
protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations.
SectionIV Page 40 of 127 10/13/2008
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
' A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon
award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy
' to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The
Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule.
B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order
' to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the
progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner.
' C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written
request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend
' delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the
Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any
additional costs which may result from work stoppage.
25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities.
' Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities.
Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties
concerned.
' 25.2.2 PRODUCTS
' 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS
25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE
' A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material
Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of
Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint
' Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names
accepted in the nursery trade.
' 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in
' the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the
species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant
diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in
' leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems.
B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant
' materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided
tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees
that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable.
C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality
for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II,
Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition).
5ectionN Page 41 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at
the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with
requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area.
E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by
governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that
are applicable to landscape materials.
F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit
Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape
Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source.
When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by
adjustment to Contract amount.
G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall
be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This
measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be
taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to
measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger
than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with
no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery.
H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where
symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible.
1. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter
and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for frill development of the
plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen.
Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B
procedures.
J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa
provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect
approves the substitution.
K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but
not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound
condition exists.
25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED
A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of
even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed
before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24
hours before laying and it must be grown. in soil compatible to that in which it will be
installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation.
B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place.
Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements.
25.2.2.1.4 MULCH
A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a
pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan.
SectionIV Page 42 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV •- Technical Specifications
B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction.
25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER
A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for
application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags
bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully
' conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws.
B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the
' appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein.
C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for
all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling.
D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release
Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
' E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St.
Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square
feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the
' nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be
1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than '/ the
nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese,
' iron, zinc, copper, etc.).
25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS
' A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree
trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used.
B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper.
Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A
minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used.
' C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with
a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4"
' by 16" wood connected with two -'/" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk.
D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved.
t
1
25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL
A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and
loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test,
prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be
unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to
the Landscape Architect immediately in writing.
B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist
of 1 /3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over V.
C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil.
There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 - 6.5 pH) with no excess of
calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps,
roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or
SectionIV Page 43 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily
organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt.
D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of
Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width
of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil.
25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting
soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's
recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans.
25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION
A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal
members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed
so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree
within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at
breast height DBH at 4 - %z feet above grade.
25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for
protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install
as directed by the manufacturer.
25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the
site.
25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES
A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's
directions.
25.2.3 EXECUTION
25.2.3.1 PREPARATION
25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities,
irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work.
B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation
of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a
relocated position for any materials necessary.
25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas
SectionIV Page 44 of 127 10/13/2008
'
Section IV - Technical Specifications
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's
' specifications.
B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been
' achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting
bed.
C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or
' "Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect.
D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals,
' the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
' E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the
Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish
grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will
' conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface
d
i
ith
t
ddli
ra
nage w
ou
pu
ng.
F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - '/z inches in any
' dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated
material off the site.
' 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING
A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of
' Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the
full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer b inches to 8
Inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface
' drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release
fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
' 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS
A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specificattons. All proposed sod areas
' adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's
Specifications.
' B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub-
grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches.
C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth,
' even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf
flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing
yard drains.
' D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1)
pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed
granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form.
' Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil.
1
SectionlV Page 45 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Scction IV - Technical Specifications
E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil
condition.
25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION
25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED)
A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated
Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction.
B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper
drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect.
C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well-
drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 -
6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.
25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans
by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as
the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent
blockage of signage, etc.
B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material
schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the
normally accepted spacing for each species.
C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of
installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant
sizes.
D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the
Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as
possible to the intent of the plans.
25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES
A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides
and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after
settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground
surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain
conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root
ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade.
C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved
equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting
tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the
middle and the bottom of the root mass.
Application rate:
SectionIV Page 46 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet
' 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet
5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet
7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet
' Trees 3 tablets each 1/2" (12 millimeters) caliper
Palms 7- 21 gram tablets
ID. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers.
' E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the
base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the
sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all
tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of
' the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade
Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in
' among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection.
F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of
the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
' Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly
water-in before bringing the Backfill up to the proper grade.
' G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each
variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to
straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant
' a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant.
H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free
Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree
' angles in a triangular pattern.
1. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved.
' 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING
A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the
soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut.
B. An application of 6-6-6, 40%0 organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made
' to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen
per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place.
C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface
' edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub
areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying
sod.
' D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water
shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50
' millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the
application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will
prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to
' keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade.
Sec1ion1V Page 47 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV -Technical Specifications
E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other
approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and
insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of
sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall
be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated.
F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean
silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be
leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas.
G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable
wooden pins or by other approved method.
25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING
A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of
Transportation. See plan for type of seed.
25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING
A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound
nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum
of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used.
Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved
plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake
above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade.
B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be
used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x
16 inch wood connected with two % inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a
minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade.
C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months
after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work.
D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially
hazardous areas.
25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING
A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching.
B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied
mulch.
C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before
compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified
on the Plans or General Notes.
D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of
buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a
minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings.
E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed
in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched
clearance from the outside edge of annuals.
SectionIV Page 48 of 127 10/13/2008
1
1
Section IV --- Technical Specifications
25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING
A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape
and form of the plant.
B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches,
and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree.
' 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP
A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner.
' B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job,
keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess
soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition.
' C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying,
staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications.
' 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on,
' about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards.
B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage.
' C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to
landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms
as specified.
' 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES
E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials,
' property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage.
F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees
to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be
I done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the
Contractor who is responsible for the damage.
' 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the
' beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance.
B. Operations:
1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds,
mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control,
replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections,
' replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out
repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural
practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under
' Section1v Page 49 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV -- Technical Specifications
the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the
University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service.
2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance
practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy,
vigorous growth of the landscape.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of
water for all planted materials before leaving the site.
25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's
Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the
installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic
inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor.
25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any
part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set
forth in Plans and Specifications.
B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape
Architect that the correction has been made.
25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE
A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of
all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in
writing.
B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the
terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty
period.
C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the
Owner.
1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in
performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment
sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such
claim.
2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or
in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species
specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract
price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative.
3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to
request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to
compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No
SectionIV Page 50 of 127 10/13/2008
1
1
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that
exceed specifications.
25.2.3.5 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a
period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is
either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no
charge to the. Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation.
during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper
materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same
with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant
shall be given the equal amount of warranty.
' 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING
1
26.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12"
sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and
form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic
sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and
functioning installation.
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for
prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the
installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system
has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The
installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system.
The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the
liner system and the installer.
26.3 MATERIALS
Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell
classification: F.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to
ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer,
from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material
shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum
property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements:
Material Property ASTM Method Value
HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi
Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi
Sectioniv Page 51 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
HDPE Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-1b/in
Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi
Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F
At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be
homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or
deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by
the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable
requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field
samples to the above requirements.
Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the
manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded.
Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design
calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading,
water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural
strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications
of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or
approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal
system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system
approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving
bids.
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage.
All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal
in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to
control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the
City's treatment plants.
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television
system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of
the entire periphery of the pipe.
SectionIV Page 52 of 127 10/13/2008
1
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the
full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner
product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods
approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe,
pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately
notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation.
Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or
problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of
irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner
shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met.
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer.
Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be
resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected
unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect
any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local
system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of
door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project.
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
26.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully
completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center
of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems.
27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS
New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the
pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be
constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the
exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified
for the street paving.
SectionIV Page 53 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications '
When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment I
shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways.
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT '
Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted.
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT '
Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above,
which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications '
and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS
This Article deleted. ,
29 CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. '
Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a
minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to
exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, '
all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the
Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs.
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ,
The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. '
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for ,
all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS '
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans '
or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh
reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise '
specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete
sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings
where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh
reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be
positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the
welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not '
SectionIV Page 54 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
1
1
1
1
1
Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6)
inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal
distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The
welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No
compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways.
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete
sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted.
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price
shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the
specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where
required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
31 SODDING
Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at
the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and
excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and
structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform
finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be
graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod
that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in
advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall
continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure,
soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract.
Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor
at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be
determined by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials,
placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these
associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly
placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor,
equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the
SectionlV Page 55 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the
Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass.
32 SEEDING
Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The
seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to
be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic
conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982
and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used
instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye
Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required
that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured.
When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment
(including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in
place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such
work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work.
33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER
STORM STRUCTURES
For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to
235.
When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans
and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the
Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other
causes until acceptance of the work.
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index
Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape
conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a
smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be
made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of
concrete base.
The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of the manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a
concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer.
SectionIV Page 56 of 127 10/13/2008
1
fl
Section IV - Technical Specifications
33.2 PRECAST TYPE
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to
secure proper seating and bearing.
Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and
junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets
will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be
in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option.
Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or
outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of
precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be
provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be
acceptable for storm structures.
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis.
34 MATERIAL USED
This article deleted. See SECTION Ill, ARTICLE 19 - MATERIAL USED.
1
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
' This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 -- CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND
SPECIFICATIONS.
' 36 STREET SIGNS
The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED.
' All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division
in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition).
' The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in
advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal.
37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS
' 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording
taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets,
easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve
as a record of a pre-construction conditions.
' 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING
The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in
any area.
S, ctionIV Page 57 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section 1V -- Technical Specifications
37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio
videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly
engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation.
37.4 EQUIPMENT
All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with
accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection.
The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with
proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio
video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such
coverage shall be obtained by walking.
37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO
Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general
location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each
video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio
recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in
viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective
description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio
recording shall also be free from any conversations.
37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the
date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time
information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be
displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name,
contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall
appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom
out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during
videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens
focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be
properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture duality. The construction documentation
shall be recorded in SP mode.
37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end,
overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas
where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer,
highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly
indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used
as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the
ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the
camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
SeetionIV Page 58 of 127 10/13/2008
1
u
fl
1
u
fl
Section IV - Technical Specifications
37.8 LIGHTING
All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during
precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to
properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of
those subjects.
37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional
' to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of
influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping
shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute.
37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX
All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number
1 and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall
describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of
' the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video
unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the
date.
' 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE
Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of
' construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be
limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features,
mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc.
' within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults,
fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or
right of way at any one time.
' 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES
' The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items
provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work.
38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS
' No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise
authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by
' mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent
vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a
project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization
' measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping.
Section1v Page 59 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV -- Technical Specifications
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES
Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent
erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required,
depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In
no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS
During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by
sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and
modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer
before installation.
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES
Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative
buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment
onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the
case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration
process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other
disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters,
dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one
week of installation.
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS
Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive
remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans.
During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided
they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City.
The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during
construction of any detention area and will be required to clean. out the detention area before
installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally
cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty
period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of
contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area
tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular
removal of sediment from the basin.
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES
Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent
waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and
the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel
work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land
alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area
are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after
the in channel work is completed.
5ectionIV Page 60 of 127 10/13/2008
1
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
' Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of
the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream
crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and
' removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a
condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity.
' 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS
All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of
excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to
' issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
1 The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance
with the following standards:
' a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time;
b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast
to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of
any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway.
38.9 MAINTENANCE
All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall
and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
38.10 COMPLIANCE
Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more
stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order".
City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods
that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation.
1
1
1
SectionIV
1
Page 61 of 127
10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
City of Clearwater - Erosion Control
This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible
for soil erosion control on their site.
The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of
soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways.
The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site
creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and
subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms
redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways.
When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The
procedure will be as follows:
1 st occurrence - Warning
2nd occurrence - $32 reinspection fee
3rd occurrence - $80 reinspecion fee
4th occurrence - Stop work order
Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify
the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly.
The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to
support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on
an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check.
If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact
Construction Services at 462-6126 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741.
Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on
all land development projects.
Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result
in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder.
Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562-4
SectionIV Page 62 of 127
10/13/200R
1
1
1 Op
AO _
pw ??
xz ?o
m o
y
? ?
qT e4 1 n c, .G
U ry g o.z F?
qRt *0 r.
w O ?ww
1 O i--1 U ?' o a
O zz? h x ..
W W 0 ?C) z F
' F ? rx
a a V ? ? O
A>? G O U
O A?
Gel
W ?wH va
z
w w
nQp o 0
two t% t? a
n ? w
mx? O O
L7: U? 0 60!) r.04 C4
W4 A Z COD
1 w?H 3 as ? °
w
OV A S
W
U
O
0
O
O
0
t
S
M
C
n
w
0
M
a
0
Section IV - Technical Specifications '
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING '
The tic in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on
the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb
of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals
cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to
service connection.
Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by
the American Public Works Association as follows:
SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission
Municipal Electric Systems
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission
Oil Distribution and Transmission
Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines
SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems
Police and Fire Communications
Cable Television
SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines
SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems
LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER
WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION
Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension
perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall
be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical
curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face. .
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 - AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK
SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE.
41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND
APPURTENANCES
41.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in
connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and
appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up.
SectionIV Page 64 of 127 10/13/2008
1
11
Section IV -Technical Specifications
41.2 MATERIALS
' 41.2.1 GENERAL
' Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall
be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of
workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and
' engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment
and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation,
except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings
' and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects
during shipment and construction.
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table:
Size Class Thickness
(In.) Rated Water Working Pressure
(PSI)
4" 51 0.26 350
6" 50 0.25 350
8" 50 0.27 350
12" 50 0.31 350
The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to
centerline of pipe.
Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
' Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with
approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest
revision.
41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4-inch through 8-inch shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
' C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241
and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784.
' Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be
compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings.
Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table:
1
' SectionTV Page 65 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Size Dimension Ratio
(OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure
(PSI) Laying Length
(Ft)
4 18 150 20
6 18 150 20
8 18 150 20
Pipe larger than 8-inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the
use of ductile iron in sizes 4-inch through 8-inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage.
The bell of 4-inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross
section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869.
Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling,
storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe
material for potable water service.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.Ci solid
strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18-inches between each piece
of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PVC pipe to 12-inches minimum
above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the
adjustable valve box, and the 2-inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass
plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M
brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and
elbows.
41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS
Fitting from 4-inch through 16-inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with
ANSUAWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in
accordance with requirements of ANSUAWWA C1 53/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall
be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require
requirements of ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA
Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic
(USA) manufacture will be acceptable.
41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT
Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved
mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants
shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on
hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint
connectors.
41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING
All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining
gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing
spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing.
SectionIV Page 66 of 127 10/13/2008
J
1
Section TV -Technical Specifications
' Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris
within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method
by the Engineer.
' 41.2.3 GATE VALVES
Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with
' respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures,
shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4-inches and larger, buried in earth shall
be equipped with 2-inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted
' with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all
valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise).
Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be
rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock.
The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body.
Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines
shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves.
Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves.
Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed.
' Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16-inch diameter, inclusive, shall be
resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with
ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the
' following features consistent with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage
at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing
body from pressure main, corrosion resistent bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with O ring
' bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body..
Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16-inch shall be suitable for the
service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in
conformance with ANSI/AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent
with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure.
All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers,
bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by-pass.
' 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES
Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast
iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3-
piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to
accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be
provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their
' installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of
5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet
' 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail.
SectionlV Page 67 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.2.5 HYDRANTS
No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of
the City of Clearwater potable water system:
• Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant,
• Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant
• AVK Nostalgic 2780.
• American Darling B-84-B.
No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater.
Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502
and include the following modifications:
1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery.
2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and must be UL/FM
listed.
3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure.
4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and
bottom with an O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil.
5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two
sections with the break flange located approximately 2-inch above the ground line.
Breakaway bolts not allowed.
6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction.
7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and
corrosion due to moisture.
8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate
operation.
9. Operating nut shall be a #7 (1-1/2-inch) pentagon nut.
10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with O-ring seals or threaded into
upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device.
11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber.
12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0-
rings to seal the barrel from.leakage of water in the shoe.
13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections
with a breakable coupling.
14. Hydrant shall have a 6-inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories.
15. Hydrant shall have a 5-1/4-inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open.
16. Hydrant shall be without drains.
17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2-inch pumper
nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread
Specifications.
SectionIV Page 68 of 127 10/13/2008
E
Section 1V -• Technical Specifications
18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with
AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision.
All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502.
' Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from
the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent
movement of the hydrant.
' All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may
be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system.
' No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of
Clearwater's Engineering Department.
' 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES
Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4-inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service
' connection allowable on 4-inch main shall be 1-1/2-inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2-
inch service connections to 6-inch and larger mains. Service saddles QCM 406 series or Ford FC
202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless
' steel straps.
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS
' 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA
Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the
tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials.
2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery;
and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or
unsatisfactory material shall be used.
3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects
shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site.
4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in
handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The
Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that
are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be
purchased from the City and installed by City work forces.
Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery
(service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest
revision.
Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when
required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from
possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed
are:
SectionIV Page 69 of 127 10/13/2008
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting,
approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the
assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve.
2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum
of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically
operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit
must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each
device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.
41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES
Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith-Blair 622. All steel
body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel
bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4-inch bronze test plug.
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS
Blow offs are not allowed.
41.3 CONSTRUCTION
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING -
Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting
with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall
such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against
pipe already on the ground.
2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged..If, however, any
part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his
expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite
or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench.
41.3.2 PIPE LAYING
41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and
hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems
plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and
sterilization of the pipe can be completed.
The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30-inches and a maximum of 42-
inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and
obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress
of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer
shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or
arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the
obstructions.
SectionrV Page 70 of 127 10/13/200$
11
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION
Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used
by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves
and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick,
ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials
and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or
dumped in the trench.
If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage
shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective
repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended
above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined
with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe
or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs
or rejection.
All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each
pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped
' clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
' Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is
being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place
without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the
' trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there
until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools,
clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
' As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the
pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with
approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to
prevent dirt from entering the joint space.
At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a
' watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer.
The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and
' workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth
end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the
' Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at
bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade.
' Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal
plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the
amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of
ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions.
No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable.
SectionlV Page 71 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS
41.3.3.1 GENERAL
Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified
above for installation of pipe.
41.3.3.2 VALVES
Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended
unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to
exceed 1$-inches from the main line.
The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb
over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished
pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 &
Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2
of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail.
41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS
Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and
minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located
10-feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the
hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of
two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants
shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's
Engineering Department.
All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the
curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with
nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer.
Each hydrant shall be, connected to the main with a 6-inch ductile iron branch controlled by an
independent 6 inch gate valve.
41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE
Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified
attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers
recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining
mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use
of hydrant connecting swivel joints.
Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown
on the plans.
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this
contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made
until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met
and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer.
SectionIV Page 72 of 127 10/13/2008
shall be prevented by
I
fl
1
1
1
1 Section IV - Technical Specifications
Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be
made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the
actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed
' before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed
under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division.
' 47.4 TESTS
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
' After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service
taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds
per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision.
All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any
hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump
connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and
all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor
at his expense.
The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water
for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line.
' 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST
The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48-hours advance
notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing.
' 41.5 STERILIZATION
' Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new
construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance
with AWWA C651.
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT
' The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to
Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or
"Perchloron".
' 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM
Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing
' shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are
not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices
generally at the ends of the lines.
' 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE
All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a
minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then
remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never
' more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be
opened and closed several times during the contact period.
SectionIV Page 73 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Spccifications
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS
After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free
residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall
be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set.
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS
After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of
Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water
from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall
forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial
examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of
coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the
absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system
is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as
outlined above.
If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in
accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall
have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of
samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all
respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida
Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into
operation.
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
41.6.1 GENERAL
Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form.
Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum
payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full
compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate
payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the
applicable pay items of work:
• Clearing and grubbing
• Excavation, including necessary pavement removal
• Shoring and/or dewatering
• Structural fill
• Backfill
• Grading
• Tracer wire
• Refill materials
• Joints materials
• Tests and sterilization
• Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system.
SectionIV Page 74 of 127
J
1
10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
' 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS
41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type
satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line,
including the length of valves and fittings.
41.6.2.2 PAYMENT
' Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation.
41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS
41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron
fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped
on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more
' than the tolerances permitted in ANSUAWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case,
the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance.
' 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings.
' 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES
' AND COVERS
41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT
' The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished
and installed.
41.6.4.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all
plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover.
41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS
41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and
' installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are
listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions.
' 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust
SectionIV Page 75 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV -- Technical Specifications
anchorage, 6-inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the
hydrant lead.
42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
This article not applicable.
43. TENNIS COURTS
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS
All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per
1,000 square foot.
Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned
into the Engineer's Office.
43.1.2 BASE COURSE
Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the
same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical
Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required.
Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to
applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer.
43.1.3 PRIME COAT
The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall
conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction".
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE
A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in
Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be
constructed running East and West.
Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot
straight edge. If a deficiency of more than t/" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE
Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section
331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed
running North and South.
Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface
shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as
approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will
Sectioniv Page 76 of 127 10/13/2008
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
be approved. If a deficiency of more than 1/" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.6 COLOR COAT
1
43.1.6.1 MATERIALS
Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured
' specifically for Tennis Court Application.
' All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for
approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for
approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and
' date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material.
43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION
' 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials.
Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor
depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the
Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with
' manufacturer's recommendations for use.
After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a
' deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled
or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications
' of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the
Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not
' require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and
rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix.
No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured.
' 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE
The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required.
Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's
' recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play.
The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for
all other others.
' The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks.
43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES
Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines
shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint.
SectionIV Page 77 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be
conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50
Degree's F and rising.
NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of
all base and asphalt related work.
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS
43.2.1 GENERAL
43.2.1.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of
clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The
scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with
sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal.
43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the
Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and
data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if
the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such
Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work
contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the
Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court
installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years.
The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of
five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a
determining factor in the award of the Bid.
43.2.1.3 STANDARDS
The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to
standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn)
Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The
Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment.
43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES
The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will
waive all permit fees.
43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT
The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The
Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in
conformance with the specifications and drawings.
Sectionl[V Page 78 of 127 10/13/2008
1
11
1
1
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction, site, as well as an
area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within
fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided.
43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE
The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable
time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and
complete.the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its
sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to
Proceed."
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION
43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY
The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts.
43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION
The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence
surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction
area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The
existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the
proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing
tennis. courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade
material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new
courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide
documentation of any recycled materials.
43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE
The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade
elevation. The sub-gradc shall be graded lcvcl. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of
the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T 180 is required. The Contractor
shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE
The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded
to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage
away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a
density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T 180 is
required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.3 SLOPE
43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS
Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in
one plane, as indicated on the drawings.
Sectioniv Page 79 of 127 10/13/2008
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION
43.2.4.1 LINER
Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a
minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to
deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows:
a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade.
43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE
The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality
Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it
shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade.
43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on
four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be
two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the
pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five
(5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control
wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system.
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING
43.2.5.1 CURB
Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of
one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation.
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE
43.2.6.1. COURT SURFACE
A surface course of 1SP Type 11 Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be
installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend
material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by
rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary
from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch.
43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER
Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the
outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating
buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis
courts.
SectionlV Page 80 of 127 10/13/2009
' Section 1V - Technical Specifications
43.2.8 FENCING
43.2.8.1 DESIGN
' The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and
described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design
Ameristar HT 25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published
' specification.
43.2.8.2 POSTS
' All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT 25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT-25
pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system.
' 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC
Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire
' with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages.
43.2.8.4 GATES
Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically
engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for
double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and
' designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes
as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock.
' Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with
padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges - Size and material to suit gate size,
non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2)
' pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height.
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS
' The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing.
Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high-
density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12)
' inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties.
43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT
' 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS
' Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in
width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance
between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles
' court.
43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES
Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven-
eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a
reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support
SectionIV Page 81 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be
Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation.
43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR
A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA.
43.2.10.4 NET
A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall
have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the
exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic
material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel
cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length
between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic
material at each corner. Basis of Design - Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc.
43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP
Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide
buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to
the center strap anchor.
43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES
Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly
secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 - 1/2) inches.
Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA.
43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Deliver the following equipment to the owner:
1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-1 Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse
transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine.
2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles;
Proline.
3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Praline.
4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle
brush; with fence hook cast aluminum.
5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline.
6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction " Scrusher" exact installation
location by Owner.
7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels.
8. Court Rake (1 each) - six-foot length aluminum.
SectionlV Page 82 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE
Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana
Bench 8" - 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation.
Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture.
43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable)
The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per
square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30
gallons of water per minute for each court.
43.2.13 CONCRETE
Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33,
and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size
aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump.
43.2.14. EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING
43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional
electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport
lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all
necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating
system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the
maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play.
Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval.
43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP
The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the
light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps.
43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT
The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development
Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works.
43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES
The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures.
The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any
other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by
the Contractor.
Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis
courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite
#104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A.
Stewart.
Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information:
Section1V Page 83 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5
Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5
Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T5 new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2
circuits
Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5
Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles.
Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall
plan relocation light poles accordingly.
43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS
Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the
Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits.
New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include
the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles.
43.2.15 WATER COOLER
43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area
of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation
Department for approval.
43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN
Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series - water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal.
43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION
Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment.
43.2.17 WARRANTY
43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all
equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project.
43.2.17.2 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against
defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of
completion.
SectionIV Page 84 of 127 10/13/2008
1
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of
two years from the day of completion.
' 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC
CONTROL
' The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone
traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization,
hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be
' necessary at outlying points.
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
' The Contractor sha11 prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of
performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction
' permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the
Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for
Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident
' Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the
U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of
Transportation, or most recent addition.
' 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY
The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians,
' bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective
may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives:
• Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones.
0 Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he
procccds through or around the work zone.
' • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle.
• Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material.
• Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site).
' • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices.
• Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or
' maintenance work zones.
The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600
"When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone,
' accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only
approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control
' zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall
be provided by appropriate signs".
2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
1
Sectioniv Page 85 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum
standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES
Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local
Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of
requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting
business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but
local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the
designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer.
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS
Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways.
Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards.
44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected
by the construction process.
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS
Consult with City Traffic staff.for preliminary traffic control options.
Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary.
44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Message Board Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer '
for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor.
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS
44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
C-View Release
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS
44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
News Release
The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days.
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a
specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the
Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone
562-4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan.
SectionlV Page 86 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
' All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or
an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida.
' 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION
The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic
control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may
make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The
Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector.
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the
' construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in
the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone
Traffic Control in the proposal form.
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
SUPERVISOR
' The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control
' Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic
Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of
Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or
sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the
Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review
' the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The
Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain
traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure
' that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification
' of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control
or to provide alternate traffic arrangements.
Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may
t be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a
designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in
temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities
deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety.
45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING
1
45.1 INTENT
' It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer
and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin
impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand
SectionlV Page 87 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Spccitications
exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a
complete, fully restored and functioning installation.
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval
for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed
liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and
successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified
by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and
complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the
installer.
45.3 MATERIALS
The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type
and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following
properties:
Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi
Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi
Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi
Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved
by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested,
complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20
traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no
structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures
specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box
181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach
Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be
approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor
prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later
than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids.
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's
responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The
Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid
heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants.
Sectioniv Page 88 of 127 10/13/2008
1
t
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The
television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear
picture of the entire periphery of the pipe.
45.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on
the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by
the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of
laterals.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place
during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass
pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes
shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots,
excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to
manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered
during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City.
The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a
later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be
available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information
regarding the construction project.
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
45.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to
provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of
manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for
storm systems.
SectionIV Page 89 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING '
46.1 MATERIALS
46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight,
high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc.,
Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or
approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D
3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall '
be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to
or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. ,
To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall
be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied.
,
46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus
maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound
except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from
the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks,
holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, ,
melt index, and other physical properties.
The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in ,
plant blending is not acceptable.
The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the
pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from '
manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM
standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the
testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at ,
selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM
D 3350, 10.1.9.
46.1.3 SAMPLES
The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical
properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and
have them tested by an independent laboratory.
'
46.1.4 REJECTION
Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this
specification.
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS I
Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless
otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as
specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work. '
SectionlV Page 90 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES
Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If
the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that
it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment.
46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS
Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should
be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt
fusion joining method.
46.3.3 PIPE JOINING
Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above
ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the
manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of
meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to,
temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures.
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE
Fused.segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused
sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred.
Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid
cutting or gouging the pipe.
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE
46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS
The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes:
12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer.
16-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer.
18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer.
21V2-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer.
28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer.
34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer.
42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer.
46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or
insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a
bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will
be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to
inserting the liner.
SectionIV Page 91 of 127 10/13/200$
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS
All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by
the specifying engineer or his representative.
Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall
be determined by the engineer.
An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the
polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of
the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times
the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible.
The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and
the water table.
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER
After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and
removed for the full length of the access shaft.
A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be
connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer.
Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to
the project requirements.
Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion.
Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours
shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow
the liner pipe to stress relieve itself.
The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it
terminates.
After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner
shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from
forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric
properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer.
The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs
or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement.
The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of
access to the area, and the working space available.
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES
The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and
installation of the liner.
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED
After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe
connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe.
SectionlV Page 92 of 127 10/13/2008
t
1
1
1
Section IV -- Technical Specifications
Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A
neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water
seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel
bands.
46.4.7 BACKFILLING
All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost
for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid
for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose,
it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to
determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide
adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage
areas will be arranged for by the contractor.
46.4.8 POINT REPAIR
The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has
been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be
made for each repair.
The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top
of the existing pipe will accomplish the. removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing
pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner.
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS
All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor.
Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be
graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in .
street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer.
47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE
47.1 SCOPE
This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm
water.
47.2 MATERIALS
' All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter".
' The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic.
' 47.3 PIPE
The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be
factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification.
SectionlV Page 43 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not
more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths.
47.4 JOINING SYSTEM
Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to
manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt
tight joint.
47.5 FITTINGS
All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or
approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe.
48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT
Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the
ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to I (one) cubic foot
(7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide
penetration in the operator's judgment.
Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society
for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C 150 for Portland
Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot.
Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali,
vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per
gallon.
Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing
adequate pressure to penetrate the area.
All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer.
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH
GUNITE
Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and
Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit,
Michigan, except as modified by those specifications.
Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent,
set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified
strength.
48.3 COMPOSITION
Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to
produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application.
SectionIV Page 94 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete
which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall
have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi.
48.5 MATERIALS
Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the
American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150
for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds
per cubic foot.
Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong,
durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing
Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates.
1
Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture.
Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following
limits:
Passing No. 3/8 Sieve 100%
Passing No. 4 Sieve 95% to 100%
Passing No. 8 Sieve 80% to 100%
Passing No. 16 Sieve 50% to 85%
Passing No. 30 Sieve 25% to 60%
Passing No. 50 Sieve 10% to 30%
Passing No. 100 Sieve 2% to 10%
48.6 WATER
Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil,
acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing
8.33 pounds per gallon.
48.7 REINFORCEMENT
Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming
to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for
Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn
steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial
Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7.
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It
shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each
shipment.
' Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the
inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling.
1
SectionIV Page 95 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION
Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and
inlets, shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all
cracks and cavities shall be. chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45
degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive
pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets
to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping
shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement
gun shall not be less than 50 psi.
Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to
remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove
all particles from the cleaning operation.
To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water
prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running
water exists.
48.10 PROPORTIONING
Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a
ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior
experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be
required.
If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of
all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring
materials shall be subject to approval.
48.11 MIXING
Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all
large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to
become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer
should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes
and from the drum at regular intervals.
Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of
water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as
required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of
cement, including the water contained in the aggregate.
Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without
being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused.
48.12 APPLICATION
Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be
placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below
32 degrees, Fahrenheit.
Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed.
Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the
SectionIV Page 96 of 127 10/13/2008
1
1
Section IV -'T'echnical Spccifications
surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in
confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or
wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty
conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses.
Guniting shall be suspended if.
1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle.
2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected.
Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the
area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All
cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of
gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh
shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind
existing reinforcement.
The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be
sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the
surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond
with succeeding applications.
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge,
preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and
adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air
j et.
48.14 SURFACE FINISH
1 Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to
ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal.
11
After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove
high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true,
flat surface.
After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish
except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings.
48.15 CURING
Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77
depending upon atmospheric condition.
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION
During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which
may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be
adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping,
brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit.
Sectionly Page 97 of 127 10/13/2008
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
48.17 INSPECTION
Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual
inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and
replaced with sound material.
48.18 EQUIPMENT
Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber
type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize
the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized
mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of
sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the
delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall
have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall
by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled
by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of
drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour
shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts.
Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle.
The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150
feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air
pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following
table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of
material hose:
Camp. Cap
(cfm) Max. Hose Dia.
(In.) Max. Size Nozzle
(In.) Min. Air Press.
(psi)
365 15/8 15/8 60
600 2 2 80
750 21/2 21/2 90
For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be
increased by 5 psi.
Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient
capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the
longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made
for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses.
Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer
capable of producing the required material velocities.
Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the
operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line
water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line.
The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating).
SectionlV Page 98 of 127 10/13/2008
fl
1
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT
It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of
manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to
' these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion
protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular
system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All
OSHA regulations shall be met.
49.2 PAYMENT
Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the
installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate
payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the
pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation,
including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and
compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions
and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or
' shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as
required for a complete and operable system.
' 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS
49.3.1 ' MATERIALS
' 49.3.1.1 LINERS
Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound
vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise
stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The
contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is
solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory
certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D
' 3753.
49.3.1.2 MORTAR
' Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts
clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve.
49.3.1.3 GROUTING
Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of
' clean, well graded sand.
SectionlV Page 99 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section W - Technical Specifications
49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the
removal of the manhole ring and corbel section.
Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls.
Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole.
Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the
manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner.
If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar.
Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing
inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts.
Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout.
Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the
outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically
as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular
void to insure an adequate bottom seal.
Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the
existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to
seal the area around the manhole liner and piping.
Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with
grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure.
Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed.
Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage.
Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing
sod.
Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness
and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II
surface.
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious
liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong
Seal MS 2 product.
Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory
training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying
the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural
cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the
application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and with the following specifications which includes:
1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
SectionIV Page 100 of 127 10/13/2009
1 Section IV -- Technical Spccifications
' 1 The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2
coat application.
' 49.4.1 MATERIALS
49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX
' Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations
and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi
2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi
3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi
4. Cement Sulfate resistant
' 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL
' Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's
recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
' 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
' 49.6 GROUTING MIX
Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according
' to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum
28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi.
49.7 LINER MIX
Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole
surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi
2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi
' 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi
4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H.
' 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi
6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight
shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot.
' Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to
5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a
lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight.
SectionIV Page 101 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according
to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide
conditions.
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site.
Sag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per
cubic foot.
Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag.
One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108
pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume.
Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater
than 5/8" in height.
Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for
any heavy metal.
Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process.
A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough
troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray
applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively
smooth finish.
49.8 WATER
Shall be clean and potable.
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS
No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or
recommendation from the manufacturer.
49.10 EQUIPMENT
A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of
producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles
with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete
with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered.
Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete
with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power
the hydraulic system and air compressor.
49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.11.1 PREPARATION
1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines
and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole.
2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high
pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and
SectionlV Page 102 of 127 10/13/2008
1
1
u
t
1
1
fl
t
1
t
Section IV - Technical Specifications
concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any
large voids with quick setting patching mix.
3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the
infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the
quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present,
drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout.
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required.
4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting
mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material.
49.11.2 MIXING
For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using
the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have
been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another
batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption
until each application is complete.
49.11.3 SPRAYING
The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running
water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all
cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light
troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the
bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface
sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second
application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1 /2 inch. The surface is then
troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the
surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel
marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have
elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is
sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at
the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to
a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a
minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow.
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING
At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or
from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or
Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109.
49.11.5 CURING
Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is
imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been
completed.
SectionrV Page 103 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Spccifications
49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT
SYSTEM
49.12.1 SCOPE
Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring
structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of:
1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume
infiltration
2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows:
a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or
b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks
3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing)
4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch
5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils
49.12.2 MATERIALS
49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT
A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to
instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The
repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall
have the following properties:
Set Time
Tensile Strength
ASTM C 307
Compressive Strength
ASTM -C 109
1-3 minutes
1 day 510 psi
3 days 745 psi
28 days 855 psi
1 day 3,125 psi
7 days 7,808 psi
28 days 9,543 psi
SectionIV Page 104 of 127 10/13/2008
1
1
1
i_J
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 day 410 psi
3 days 855 psi
28 days 1,245 psi
49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING
Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either
one or both of the following materials:
1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in
and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows:
Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86
Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86
Bonding Strength 250-300 psi
2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent
seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior
of manhole. Physical properties are as follows:
Density 8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574
Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412
Elongation 250% ASTM D-3574
Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D-1042
Toxicity Non Toxic
49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING
A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system
combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to
seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three
components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the
substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks
the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for
approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are
as follows:
Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement
ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi
' Tensile Strength
(7 day cure)
ASTM C 190
1
Permeability
(3 day cure)
CRD 48 55
49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING
380 psi (2.62 MPa)
325 psi (2.24 MPa)
8.1 x10 llcm/sec to
7.6x10 cm/sec
at 100% RH
at 50% RH
A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and
provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following
properties:
I Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hns 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days
Section1V Page 105 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000
Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000
Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 X0.08
Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage
Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile
Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3%
Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4-5%
Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F.
The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C
1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture
shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will
have a dark grey color.
49.12.2.5 EPOXY COATING
A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This
epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including
excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be
applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its
uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the
following properties at 75 degrees F:
Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1
Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray
Pot Life, hrs 1
Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000
Tensile Elongation, % 10-20
Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max 5
Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800
49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK,
Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin
Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others.
49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW
Work shall proceed as follows:
1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client.
2. Clean manhole and remove debris.
a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris.
b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease.
c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure.
SectionIV Page 106 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV -Technical Specifications
d. Remove debris from work area.
3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement.
(Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as
required by client.
4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration.
5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as
needed.
6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces.
7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces.
NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step
6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to
cement lining.
' 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION
An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the
rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to
remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from
entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective
' screens.
49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR
' Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill
cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying
waterproofing/crystallization.
' 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL
Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam.
1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface.
2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Inject material until water flow stops.
4. Remove fittings (if necessary).
49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS
' 1.
2 Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiffbrush, forming an undercoat.
A
l
d
d
#2
l
b
h
d
. pp
y
ry pow
er
to s
urry coat
y
.
an
' 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal
forming process.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks.
5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat.
6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining.
'
SectionIV Page 107 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING
1. Dampen surface.
2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application.
3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches)
has been achieved.
4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole.
5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish.
6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating.
NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing
times.
49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING
Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a
thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6)
hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours.
49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP
The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area.
49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12.3.10 WARRANTY
All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years,
provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used.
50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 -- PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS.
51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM
51.1 SCOPE 1
1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over
recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the
SectionIV Page 108 of 127 10/13/2008
1
1
1
1
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex
System.
2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a
satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface.
3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution.
4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System
+ 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer
+ 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave
+ 2 Coats of Plexiflor
+ Plexicolor Line Paint
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS
51.2.1 ASPHALT
Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths,
cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California
Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to
indentation).
' 51.2.2 CONCRETE
Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL
' FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the
concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer
according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and
other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification
Section 10.14.
1
1
1
51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX
Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder
1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement.
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT
1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level
surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to
California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix:
Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons
Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons
Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-900 pounds
Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons
2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending
on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with
California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix
SectionIV Page 109 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still
tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate
of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE
After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted
rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix:
Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons
Plexichrome 20 gallons
Water 20 gallons
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION
1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be
diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and
provide uniform application.
2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with
sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light
pressure to the squeegee.. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee.
Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action.
4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to
application of subsequent coats.
51.6 PLAYING LINES
Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately
located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line
Hockey Association.
51.7 GENERAL
1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion
of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner.
Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local,
State and Federal regulations.
2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed,
property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled
with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner
will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site.,
Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified.
51.8 LIMITATIONS
1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50°F or more than 1 40°F.
2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent.
3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water.
SectionIV Page 110 of 127 10/13/2008
'
Section IV - Technical Specifications
' 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings.
5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun.
' 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use.
l
ifl
ill
7. P
ex
or w
not prevent substrate cracks from occurring.
' 8.
9. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates.
Coefficient of friction = 0.78
10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 701F with 60% relative
humidity.
11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery.
In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear.
52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START
OF CONSTRUCTION.
' 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES
i 53.1 MATERIAL
53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL
' 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES
' Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a
double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of
a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge
12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal
Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5,
Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating
shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or
Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or
exceed four 1-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239.
The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC
coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3
1/4 inches by 4 %2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC
coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire
core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall
diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire
shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in
diameter (approx. US gauge 13 %a), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized
wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be
permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge
point with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed
' condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a
minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-Tite
SectionIV Page 111 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener
shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal.
All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with
ASTM A-641.
53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING
The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not
less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist
deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show
any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to
attack from acids and resistant to abrasion.
1. Specific Gravity:
a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34.
2. Tensile Strength:
a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi.
3. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain.
4. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. According to ASTM 1242.; weight loss <12% (Method B).
5. Brittleness Temperature:
a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade
below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but
not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade.
6. Hardness:
a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested.
7. Creeping Corrosion:
a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall
not be more than 25mrn when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a
50% SOLUTION HC1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be).
53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS
Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is
submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests:
1. Salt Spray Test:
a. According to ASTM B-117
b. Period of test = 3000 hours.
2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays:
a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test =
3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade.
SectionIV Page 112 of 127 10/13/2008
Section TV -Technical Specifications
i 3. Exposure to high temperature:
a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287.
i 53
1
1
4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS
.
. .
i After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit
the following properties:
1. Appearance:
i a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable
change in color.
i 2. Specific Gravity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value.
i 3. Durometer Hardness:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
' 4. Tensile Strength:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
i 5. Elongation:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
i 6. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
i .7. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
i 8. Brittleness Temperature:
a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade.
b. Cold Flex Temperature -Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade.
i 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:
i The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is
started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or
supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific
i gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure.
The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote
deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be
i retained in the gabion or mattress baskets.
The stone shall meet the following physical requirements:
i • Absorption, maximum 5%
• Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45%
• Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), maximum loss 12%
i
SectionIV Page 113 of 127 10/13/2008
i
Section IV - Technical Specifications
• Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest
dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight.
All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical
diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by
weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening.
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE
Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows:
1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866
inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A
641, Table 3.
2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of
the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and
lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge.
3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close
helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel
having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is
completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such
an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers.
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard
Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985.
53.2 PERFORMANCE
Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such
a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into
rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses
shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a
single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a
manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the
mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width,
they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall
be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no
additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not
ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections
forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut.
Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The
binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single
and double loops are alternated.
A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and
binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical
reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled
line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back.
SectionIV Page 114 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended.
Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions
shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to
opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full
' and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one
two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top.
Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the
cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or
' cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against
movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be
replaced or. repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work
shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the
manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less.
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
54.1 SCOPE
To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of
plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems;
ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces
at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance
activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone.
The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street
medians including:
• Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic;
• Trash and debris removal from the job site;
• Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces;
• Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms;
• Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); .
• Irrigation service and repair;
• Mulch replacement;
• Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the
• Reporting of irregularities at the job site.
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract
between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed
holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract
maintenance at other hours.
All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc.,
be completed before leaving the job site.
SectionlV Page 115 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
54.3 WORK METHODS
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service).
Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in
writing by an authorized representative of the other party.
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT
The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated
location:
54.4 LITTER
Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and
debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes,
tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor
should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the
extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered.
54.5 VISUAL CHECK
The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or
damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours
after providing the service.
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING
All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature
size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants
in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while
maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants
shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope.
:Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following
flower formation, according to the following specifications:
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY
DATE, ETC.)
Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to
remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded
heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation;
such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the
trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed
on palms.
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL
All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the
contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion.
SectionIV Page 116 of 127 10/13/2008
t
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
' 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL
Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the
contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications.
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
' Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park
users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high
pedestrian use areas.
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION
All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur
' .coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in
mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and
' amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials.
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA
' Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable.
Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied
by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor
' at his/her expense.
54.13 MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil
moisture, usually 3 inches.
' 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing
should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and
operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled
system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in
' advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to
the monthly maintenance fee.
' 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a
' less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be
replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on
City properties.
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION
' Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across
the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February.
1
SectionIV Page 117 of 127 10/13/200$
Section IV -Technical Specifications
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION
The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost
sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet
to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the
sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's
directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City
will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to
protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it
to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or
remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about
removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may
cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day
(5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site
work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for
the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate
per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations
with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform
remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City.
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE
This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7
working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no
further than ten calendar days apart.
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK
Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to
monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a
phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between
6:30 a.m. - 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. - 3:00 p.m.
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the
following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City
shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be
given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been
completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed.
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month
period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate
irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the
landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm
heads/fronds as he feels appropriate.
2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates.
SectionIV Page 118 of 127
1
10/13/2008
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
' 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with
trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature
caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing
of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option,
invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next
regular payment to the Contractor.
5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked
vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular
' schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall
schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining
' circumstances are relieved.
55 MILLING OPERATIONS
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE
Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be
' performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
' milling.
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS
1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible
to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal
environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment.
2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless
otherwise noted in the contract documents.
3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of
the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom
Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its
own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep
debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving
the job site.
' 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled
to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface.
1 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line
and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this
removal shall be included in the bid item for milling.
6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling.
' 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the
road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for
1
SectionI V Page 119 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed
that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a
failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and
at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City
approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for
milling.
9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after
the milling operation is complete.
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the
City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to
schedule delivery of material.
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory
requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City.
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their
owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners
the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility
adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing
operations.
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances
shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's
Technical Specifications.
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING
There are two types of milling used by the City:
A. Wedge - This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the
pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height
and pavement cross section.
B. Full Width - This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of
pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry
shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer.
SectionIV Page 120 of 127
1
10/13/2008
1
' Section IV - Technical Specifications
' 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS
Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to
restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend
approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale.
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted.
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and
stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of
radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's
discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals
' necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications.
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures,
appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles,
posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through
' the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction.
Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard
' Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the
Contractor shall take, ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in
accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements.
' 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and
' grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and
structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape
' trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
57 RIPRAP
' The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble
riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's
' Standard Specifications (lastest edition).
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand-
cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble.
1
SectionIV Page 121 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section fV -'rechnical Specifications
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling,
equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and
shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill,
dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap.
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY
This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants
(WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs.
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL
The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water
reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and
ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include:
• An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns
to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided
with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response
Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the
contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of
these documents.
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING
Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding
employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must
include:
• Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and undcrstood training
in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around
gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas.
The date of the training, and
The means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents
and plans.
This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment,
materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit,
signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power
service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors,
SectionIV Page 122 of 127 10/13/2008
1
F1
11
Section IV - Technical Specifications
' pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of
existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs.
All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's
Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer
registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report,
shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All
I mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the
manufacturer.
All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both
the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown
features.
' Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the
City's Traffic Engineering Division.
I 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
' and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to
complete the work per the plans.
' 60 SIGNING AND MARKING
All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard
Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and
markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular
delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972).
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or
markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No
' payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or
markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made.
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the
work per the plans.
' 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING
All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard
' Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
' The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work
per the plans.
SectionIV Page 123 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section 1V - Technical Specifications
62 TREE PROTECTION
62.1 TREE BARRICADES
A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land
preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all
staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows:
1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms.
2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer
species.
3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species
4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand.
S. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts.
Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in
the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart.
.Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and
shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative
must approve any variation from the above requirements.
C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is
terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during
construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall
remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor
utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative.
D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or
debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier
no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No
equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such
protective barriers.
E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall he attached to any
protected tree or palm.
F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this
section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees.
62.2 ROOT PRUNING
A. Where proposed construction improvements. involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical
root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society
of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce
the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to
any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean
pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be
pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand
digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment
designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is
strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by
SectionIV Page 124 of 127 10/13/2008
Section IV - Technical Specifications
construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade
or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz,
Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root
Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector
assigned to the project.
B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International
Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist.
C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted)
' inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning.
D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is
feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated
' tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning.
E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any
' root pruning activities.
F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter
from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said
' root pruning.
G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be
done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less
than 18".
H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent.
Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to
any work adjacent to trees to be preserved.
1. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any
excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected.
J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree
roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled
around to prevent damage to the root.
K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or
burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established.
L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may
' require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root
pruned trees. .
' M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root
pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional
boring as opposed to open trenching.
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING
' A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or
under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified
arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations - Tree, Shrub and
other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300.
SectionIV Page 125 of 127 10/13/2008
1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts
(pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree)
are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be
recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require
replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances.
C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed.
D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been
improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing
condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage
trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been
damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy
growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
63 PROJECT WEB PAGES
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN
If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the
current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project
information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project
Contacts.
Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer
shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the
Project Web Pages.
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES
Project Web Pages should conform to the WX Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section
508 guidelines whenever possible:
http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/
http://www.section508.gov/
In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for
images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics.
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE
The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic
material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles,
apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion
shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to
fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside
vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public
Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public
Communications. This is for internal use only.
SectionIV Page 126 of 127 10/13/2008
1
1
1
1
Section IV ... Technical Specifications
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS
Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics
should be posted to the Project Web Pages.
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS
The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back
to the City regarding the Project.
63.6 POSTING
' The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web
Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved,
should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity
issues.
' 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES
Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages
' up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's
Webmaster for posting.
1 SectionIV Page 127 of 127 10/13/2008
11
SECTION IV=A
SUPPLEMENTARY
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
¦
1
fl
SECTION IVa
SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the Technical Specifications of
the Construction Contract. Where any article of the Technical Specifications is modified or any
paragraph, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the
unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect.
MODIFICATIONS TO SECTION IV - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ARTICLES 1-63
Basis for measurement and payment for all Articles shall be superseded by Section 01025
Measurement and Payment of the Supplemental Technical Specifications.
13.0 SANITARY MANHOLES
' Vacuum testing shall be carried out immediately after assembly and prior to backfilling of
manholes that are up to 72 inches in diameter. All lift holes shall be plugged with a non-shrink
grout or rubber plug. The manhole frame and adjusting rings and chimney seals shall be in place
' before testing. No grout shall be placed in the horizontal joints. All pipes entering the manhole
shall be plugged, taking care to securely brace the plugs from being drawn into the manhole with
the vacuum testing. Vacuum testing shall test all manholes for leakage. A vacuum of 10 inches
' of mercury shall be placed on the manhole and the time shall be measured for the vacuum to
drop 9 inches of mercury. The vacuum shall not drop below 9 inches of mercury for the
designated time periods for each size manhole. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than
' sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60)
inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes.
' The Contractor shall provide all material, equipment, and labor for testing. Tests shall be
performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. Testing shall be
completed before backfilling so that any leaks can be found and fixed externally. If the manhole
' fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory
test is obtained.
20.0 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
20.1 MATERIALS
20. 1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
' PVC pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C-900, polyvinyl chloride
(PVC). The push-on joints shall have an elastomeric-gasket conforming to
TBE Group. Inc. _ Supplementary Technical Specifications
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECi'S\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\SectionlVa.docSection IVa-I
Febn
ASTM D3139 for a watertight seal. PVC pipe 4 inches through 12 inches shall be
class 150, DR 18. PVC pipe 14 inches and larger shall meet the requirements of
AWWA Standard 0-905 PVC and shall be CL 235, DR 18. All pipe shall be
color coded green and continually marked.
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Force main pipe and fittings shall be ductile iron as follows:
a. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with
ANSUAWWA C-151/A21.51 and shall be Class 51 or greater. Ductile
iron pipe and fittings for water mains shall have an asphaltic outside
coating and a cement lining inside in accordance with ANSUAWWA
C 104/A21.4. Ductile iron pipe and fittings for sanitary sewer force main
shall have a PROTECTO 401 ceramic epoxy interior lining with a
minimum dry film thickness of 40 mils. All fittings shall be restrained
joint. All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured by American, McWane,
U.S. Pipe, or approved equal.
b. Bell Restraint: Ductile iron pipe bell restraint shall consist of a wedge
action restraint ring on the spigot joined to a split ductile iron ring behind
the bell. The restraint ring shall have individually actuated wedges that
increase their resistance to pullout as pressure or external forces increase.
The restraint ring and its wedging components shall conform to ASTM
A536. The wedges shall be heat treated to a minimum hardness of 370
BHN. Torque limiting twist off nuts shall be used to insure proper
actuatitln of the restraining wedges. The split ring shall conform to ASTM
A 536.. The connecting tie rods that join the tow rings shall be make of
low alloy steel that conforms to one safety factor, of 350 psi in sizes 16-
inch and below and 250 psi in sizes 18-inch through 36-inch. The product
shall be the series 1700 Megalug restraint harness manufactured by EBAA
Iron or approved equal.
C. Mechanical Joint Restraint: Gland body and restraint components shall be
made from ductile iron and can be used with the standardized mechanical
joint bell conforming to ANSUAWWA C111/A21.11 and ANSUAWWA
C153/A21.53 of the latest version. Restraint assembly shall be capable of
full deflection both during and after assembly. The restraint shall be
Series 1100 Megalug as produced by EBBA Iron or approved equal.
d. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be polyethylene encased (minimum
8 mil thick and color coded) in accordance with ANSUAWWA
A21.5/C 105 and ASTM A 674. Polyethylene encasement shall be green
in color for sanitary sewer mains and blue for potable water mains.
T_BE Group, Inc. Supplementary Technical Specifications
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\SectionIVa.docSection IVa-2
1
20.4 TESTING
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
Deflection tests shall be performed on all flexible pipe. The test shall be
conducted after the final backfill has been in place for at least 30 days to
permit stabilization of the soil-pipe system. No pipe shall exceed a
deflection of 5 percent. If deflection exceeds 5 percent, replacement or
correction shall be accomplished in accordance with requirements in the
approved specifications. The rigid ball or mandrel used for the deflection
test shall have a diameter not less than 95 percent of the base inside
diameter or average inside diameter of the pipe depending on which is
specified in the ASTM specification, including the appendix, to which the
pipe is manufactured. The pipe shall be measured in compliance with
ASTM D 2122 Standard Test Method of determining dimensions of
thermoplastic pipe and fittings. The test shall be performed without
mechanical pulling devices.
SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 Summaryof Work .................................................................. 01010-1 THRU 01010-5
01025 Measurement and Payment .................................................... 01025-1 THRU 01025-4
01046 Modifications to Existing Structures Piping, and Equipment 01046-1 THRU 01046-2
01090 Reference Standards ............................................................... 01090-1 THRU 01090-3
01310 Construction Schedules .......................................................... 01310-1 THRU 01310-3
01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples .......................... 01340-1 THRU 01340-3
01370 Schedule of Values ................................................................. 01370-1 THRU 01370-2
01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls ................... 01500-1 THRU 01500-6
01570 Traffic Control ........................................................................ 01570-1 THRU 01570-3
01600 Material and Equipment ......................................................... 01600-1 THRU 01600-3
01650 Starting of Mechanical Systems ............................................. 01650-1 THRU 01650-3
01700 Contract Closeout ................................................................... 01700-1 THRU 01700-3
01730 Operating and Maintenance Data ........................................... 01730-1 THRU 01730-5
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02220 Structure Excavation and Backfill ..........................................02220-1 THRU 02220-4
1 TBE Group, Inc. Supplementary Technical Specifications
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20 I O\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\Section1Va.docSection IVa-3
Febn
1
02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting .....................
02532 Fiberglass Manhole ......................................................
02574 Pavement Removal and Replacement ........................
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 Concrete ..................................................................
03600 Grout .......................................................................
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09910 Existing Wet Well Rehabilitation.
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11305 Submersible Sewage Pumps, Controls, and Panels
02221-1 THRU 02221-5
02532-1 THRU 02532-6
02574-1 THRU 02574-5
03300-1 THRU 03300-10
..03600-1 THRU 03600-2
09910-1 THRU 09910-4
11305-1 THRU 11305-10
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050 Piping, Fittings, Valves, and Accessories ............................15050-1 THRU 15050-15
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050 Electrical - General Provisions ..............................................16050-1 THRU 16050-5
16100 Basic Materials and Methods .................... ........... ..................16100-1 THRU 16100-2
16110 Raceways and Fittings ............................................................16110-1 THRU 16110-2
16120 Wires and Cables ....................................................................16120-1 THRU 16120-3
16170 Overcurrent Protective Devices ............................. .................16170-1 THRU 16170-2
16500 Lighting Fixtures ....................................................................16500-1 THRU 16500-1
16941 Pump Station Electrical Provisions ......................................16941-1 THRU 16941-12
TBB Group, Inc.SuPP-lementary Technical Specifications
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\SectionlVa.docSection IVa-4
1
I
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The work covered by these specifications comprises, in general, the furnishing of
all labor, equipment, materials. The work shall include the performing of all
operations to rehabilitate Pump Station 41 for the City of Clearwater as described
and specified further in these Technical Specifications, and as shown on the
Contract Drawings.
B. Pump Station 41 will be rehabilitated in place as described in the attached
drawings.
C. Pump Station 41 will receive new pumps, piping, and electrical modifications as
described on the attached plans and specified herein.
D. Except as specifically noted, the Contractor shall provide and pay for:
1. Labor, materials, tools, construction equipment, and machinery.
2. Bypass pumping, including redundancy, to assure the continuous
operation of the wastewater collection system through construction.
3. Continuous operation of all utilities throughout construction.
4. Water and utilities required for construction.
5. Other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and
completion of the work.
b. Testing lab services.
7. Hiring of Data Flow Systems to evaluate the height and position of the
telemetry antenna.
8. Connection fees and permits as required.
E. The Contractor shall comply with all codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders
and other legal requirements of the City of Clearwater.
F. The contractor shall attend Progress Meetings, usually every two weeks.
G. The contractor is to deliver an updated Submittal Log and an updated RFI Log at
each Progress Meeting.
H. A Submittal Schedule is to be delivered by the contractor at the Preconstruction
Meeting. It shall list all the required submittals for the project. No additional
contract time will be added due to untimely submission of submittals.
Cardno TBE Summary of Work
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\201O\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\O 101 O.doc 01010-1 Febru,
I. An RFI Log shall be maintained by the contractor. No additional contract time
will be added due to the untimely submission of RFIs.
J. All change orders must have City approval prior to acceptance.
K. A Generic Groundwater Discharge Permit is required for discharging drainage
water into the City's storm system or bodies of water. Groundwater samples shall
be taken and tested by a laboratory before the permit is issued.
1.02 CONSTRUCTION SURVEY AND RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all construction stakes required to
complete the work. Construction stakes shall be provided by a survey crew
working under the direction of a surveyor registered in the State of Florida, and
qualified to perform the type of survey stakeout required by the plans and details.
All work items shall be staked, flagged and marked in such manner to afford easy
identification by the Contractor and the Owner's Representative. Whenever
stakes are lost, they shall be replaced before continuing with the work.
B. The Contractor shall provide four sets of certified record drawings, signed and
sealed by a surveyor registered in the state of Florida and an AutoCad file. The
record drawings shall show final grades, locations and elevations of all
equipment and utilities. All grades, locations and elevations shall be determined
by the surveyor. All valves, fittings and other appurtenances shall be shown.
Information shall be presented as x, y data in the State Plane coordinates utilizing
North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical
Datum of 1988.
C. At the completion of the work, the record drawings shall be delivered to the
Engineer for review and approval prior to requesting final payment. If there are
any discrepancies noted on the record drawings, they will be returned to the
Contractor for checking and correction of work as determined by the Engineer.
1.03 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall implement erosion and sediment control practices that will
prevent the introduction of pollutants into the storm water system. Erosion and
sediment controls shall include both stabilization practices and structural
practices.
B. The Contractor shall take adequate precautions to prevent siltation and bank
erosion in discharging well point systems or during other construction activities.
This includes the placement of erosion control devices, such as silt barriers or
settling basins, when necessary to prevent silt from entering the drainage system.
Whenever traffic will be leaving a construction site and moves directly onto a
public road or other paved area, a temporary gravel construction entrance, per
Cardno TBE Summary of Work
SAEngin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJ> C1'S\2010\Llr" 1' S'1'A'1'IQN 41 REPAIRS\0101 0.doc 01010-2
7
L_;
r City of Clearwater Standards, shall be installed to reduce the amount of sediment
transported onto public roads by motor vehicles or runoff. The entrance shall be
' maintained in a condition that will prevent tracking or flow of sediments onto
public rights-of way. All materials spilled, dropped, washed, or tracked from
vehicles onto roadways or into storm drains must be removed immediately. The
' road or paved area must be swept daily for sediments and stones.
C. All erosion and sediment control devices shall be checked daily or immediately
' after a storm event and shall be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. All
erosion and sediment control methods shall be in accordance with F.D.O.T. Index
No. 102 and shall comply with all state and local water quality standards. The
' City Engineer or the appointed City personnel has the right to enforce immediate
cleanup and maintenance of any and all sediments on or off site.
D. If required, the Contractor shall obtain an Environmental Resource Permit for
groundwater discharge.
1.04 HOUSEKEEPING BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES
A. A construction site management plan shall be developed by the Contractor to
' prevent pollutants from entering the storm water system. Pollutants include but
are not limited to oils, grease, paints, gasoline, concrete truck washdown,
solvents, litter, debris and sanitary waste.
B. The construction site management plan shall designate areas for equipment
maintenance and repair; shall provide waste receptacles at convenient locations
' and shall provide regular collection of wastes; shall locate equipment washdown
areas on site and shall provide appropriate control of washwaters; shall provide
protected storage areas for chemicals, paints, solvents fertilizers and other
potentially toxic materials; and shall provide adequately maintained sanitary
facilities
1 1.05 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. The Contractor shall furnish suitable storage facilities. All materials, supplies and
' equipment intended for use in the work shall be suitably stored by the Contractor
to prevent damage from exposure, admixture with foreign substances, or
vandalism or other cause. The Engineer will refuse to accept, or sample for
' testing, materials, supplies or equipment that have been improperly stored, as
determined by the Engineer.
' B. Materials found unfit for use shall not be incorporated in the work and shall
immediately be removed from the construction or storage site. Delivered
' materials shall be stored in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before any
payment for same will be made. Materials strung out along the line of
Cardno TBE Summary of Work
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01010.doe 01010-3
Febru
construction will not be allowed unless the materials will be installed within one
week from the time of unloading and stringing out.
1.06 PRESERVATION OF PROPERTY
A. The Contractor shall preserve from damage all property along the line of the
work, or which is in the vicinity of or is in any way affected by the work, the
removal or destruction of which is not called for by the plans. Wherever such
property is damaged due to the activities of the Contractor, it shall be immediately
restored to its original condition by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B. In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to restore such property, or to make
good such damage for injury, the Owner may, after 48 hours notice to the
Contractor, proceed to repair, rebuild or otherwise restore such property as may
be deemed necessary, and the cost thereof will be deducted from any monies due,
or which may become due, the Contractor under this contract.
1.07 CLEAN UP
A. The Contractor shall keep the construction site free of rubbish and other materials
and restore to their original conditions those portions of the site not designated for
the alteration by the Contract Documents. Clean up and restoration shall be
accomplished on a continuing basis throughout the contract period and in such a
manner as to maintain a minimum of nuisance and interference to the general
public and residents in the vicinity of the work.
B. The Contractor shall also remove, when no longer needed, all temporary
structures and equipment used in his operation. It is the intent of this
specification that the construction areas and those other areas not designated for
alteration by the Contract Documents shall be immediately restored to original
condition upon completion of the project.
C. The submitted construction schedule shall indicate this construction sequence:
• Debris piles shall be removed within 5 consecutive calendar days.
• Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within 10 consecutive
calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times.
• All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP.
• Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a
sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed 15
consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained
at all times.
• Sod must be restored within 10 days of a successful pressure test. It must
be watered for a period of 30 days after it is placed. Erosion control and
dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times.
Cardno TBE Summary of Work
S:\rngin\hNCiINE RING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01010.doc 01010-4
1
1
1.08 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE
A. The Contractor shall at all times so conduct his work as to ensure the least
possible obstruction to traffic, or inconvenience to the general public and
residents in the vicinity of the work. No road or street shall be closed to the
public, except with the permission of the Engineer and other jurisdictional
governmental authority, if any. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the work shall be
kept accessible. Provisions shall be made by the Contractor to ensure public
access to sidewalks, public telephones, and the proper functioning of all gutters,
sewer inlets, drainage ditches, and irrigation ditches. No open excavation shall be
left overnight except during road closing. All open excavation within the
roadway shall be backfilled and a temporary asphalt patch applied prior to
darkness each day. A cold asphalt patch is acceptable.
1.09 SAFETY AND OSHA COMPLIANCE
A. The Contractor shall comply in all respects with all Federal, State and Local safety
and health regulations. Copies of the Federal regulations may be obtained from
the U.S. Department of Labor, Occupation Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA), Washington, DC 20210 or their regional offices.
B. The Contractor shall comply in all respects with the applicable Workman's
Compensation Law.
1.10 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
1
A. Coordinate the use of premises under direction of Engineer.
B. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of equipment and
materials stored on the site.
C. Move any stored Products, under Contractor's control, which interfere with
operations of the Owner or separate Contractor.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TBE Summa of Work
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01010.doc 01010-5
Febru
SECTION 01025
I MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1 PART 1- GENERAL
' 1.01 EXPLANATION AND DEFINITIONS
The following explanation of the Measurement and Payment for the bid farm items is made for
' information and guidance. The omission of reference to any item in this description shall not,
however, alter the intent of the bid form or relieve the Contractor of the necessity of furnishing
such as part of the Contract.
1.02 PAYMENT
' A. Payment shall be made for the items listed on the Bid Form on the basis of the
work actually performed and completed. Such work shall include, but is not
limited to, the furnishing of all necessary labor, materials, tools, equipment,
' transportation, clean up, and all other incidentals and appurtenances to complete
the construction and installation of the work, to the configuration and extent as
shown on the drawings, and described in the specifications.
B. It is intended that all mobilization, insurance, bond, license and other
miscellaneous administrative costs, and all other costs to the Contractor not
specifically identified in the following item description be distributed among and
included in the unit prices stated. No additional payment shall be made for
transportation, communications, office maintenance, project signs, and other
' incidental work or services, and no further payment shall be made for
remobilization unless all of the work is suspended by the Engineer for a period in
excess of three months and through no fault of the Contractor.
' C. All required testing and certification should be included in the unit prices shown
in the Proposal and Contract. All testing shall be paid for by the Contractor.
1
PART 2 - MATERIALS
Not Used
' Cardno TSE Measurement and Payment
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECrS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01025.doc 01025-1
1
Febru
PART 3 - EXECUTION '
3.01 MOBILIZATION - Bid Item No. 1 '
A. Payment for mobilization will include documented and justified costs associated
with preparatory work and operations necessary to begin work on the Project,
including but not limited to those operations necessary for the movement of '
personnel, equipment supplies, and incidentals to the Project site(s), and for the
establishment of temporary offices, buildings, safety equipment and first aid
supplies, sanitary and other facilities as required by the Plans and Specifications '
and all applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations.
B. The cost of bonds and any other required insurance and any other pre-construction
expenses necessary for the start of the Work, excluding the cost of construction
materials, shall also be included in this Pay item. '
C. The Work specified under this Pay Item will be paid for at the Contract lump sum
price, in accordance with the following schedule: '
Percent of Original Allowable Percent of Lump Sum
Contract Amount Earned Price for Mobilization
5 25 '
10 50
25 75
50 100 ,
3.02 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC - Bid Item No. 2 '
A. Description: The work specified in this Item consists of maintaining traffic within
the limits of the project for the duration of the construction period including any
temporary suspensions of the work. It shall include the construction and '
maintenance of any necessary detour facilities; the providing of necessary
facilities for access to residences, businesses, etc. along the project; the '
furnishing, installing and maintaining of traffic control and safety devices during
construction, the control of dust, and any other special requirements for safe and
expeditious movement of traffic or pedestrians as may be called for on the plans. '
The term, Maintenance of Traffic, as used herein, shall include all of such
facilities, devices and operations as are required for the safety and convenience of
the public as well as for minimizing public nuisance. ?.
B. Measurement: The quantity of Maintenance of Traffic to be paid for under this
Item shall be measured as one lump sum quantity. Partial payments will be '
pro-rated throughout the duration of construction of this Project in direct
proportion to the percent completion of the work, as determined by the ratio of the
payment requested to the total contract price. '
Cardno TBE Measurement and Payment 1
S:\Eugin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20I0\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\0I025.doc 01025-2 Februan
1
1 3.03
C. Payment: The quantities, as determined above, shall be paid for at the contract
lump sum price set out in the Proposal, which price and payment constitutes full
compensation for all the work described herein.
FURNISH AND INSTALL PUMP STATION 41 REHABILITATION - Bid Item
No. 3
D. Description: This bid item describes measurement and payment for the
rehabilitation of Pump Station 41 complete as specified and shown on the
Drawings.
E. Measurement and Payment: Payment of the lump sum agreed on in the bid form
shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and
incidentals required to complete the rehabilitation of Pump Station 41 complete as
shown on the Drawings and specified in these Technical Specifications, excluding
those items for which measurement and payments are separately specified.
Payment shall include, but not be limited to, full compensation for removal and
disposal of existing pump station components as described within the plans,
furnishing and installing a wet well epoxy lining system, valve vault, influent
fiberglass manhole with inside drop tee, wet well connection, force main
connection, sheeting, shoring and bracing, backfill, erosion and sedimentation
control, protection of existing structures and utilities, utility coordination,
.coatings, two (2) pumps, guide rails, piping, fittings, couplings, restraints, valves,
bypass assembly, hatches, concrete driveway and slabs, pump control panel,
electrical wiring, conduit, RTU and telemetry equipment, electrical
appurtenances, electrical supply, hiring of Data Flow Systems to analyze and
evaluate the relocated position of the existing antenna, cleaning and testing, all
restoration including but not limited to sidewalks, curbs, asphalt, sod, etc; and all
other work and equipment required for a full, operable, and complete installation
as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Data Flow Systems shall be
hired to analyze and evaluate the position of the telemetry antenna.
3.04 FURNISH AND INSTALL BYPASS PUMPING - Bid Item No. 4
A. Description: This bid item describes measurement and payment for bypass
pumping during the rehabilitation of Pump Station 41.
B. Measurement and Payment: Payment of the lump sum agreed on in the bid form
shall be full compensation for fiirnishing all labor, materials, power, equipment
and incidentals required to setup, maintain and operate a temporary sewage
bypass system as necessary during the proposed construction. Payment shall
include, but not be limited to, compensation for temporary flow control via bypass
pumps and associated piping; required power and/or fuel; standby pump for each
size bypass pump utilized; continued operation of existing SCADA system during
bypass; emergency response to alarm notification of breakdown or failure of the
bypass system; any fines and/or restoration associated with wastewater spills;
Cardno TBE _ Measurement and Payment
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01025.doc 01025-3 Febru
1
sanitizing, flushing, and disassemble of bypass system, restoration of area to
existing condition, and all other items necessary to conduct temporary bypass
pumping.
3.05 CONTINGENCY - Bid Item No. 5
A. Description: The work covered by this item consists of unforeseen items of work
not included in other bid items but necessary for accomplishing the work and
shall apply only to extra work or additional items over and above those specified
or shown on the plans. The cost of this additional work shall be agreed upon in
writing and approved by the Director of Utilities Engineering or his authorized
representative prior to starting this additional work. The value of the work shall
be based on unit prices or similar bid items called for in the proposal.
B. Measurement: The quantities of unspecified work to be paid under this item shall I
be measured in place, completed and accepted.
C. Payment: The Owner has calculated this item on the Bid Form, and has
established the item total to be used in calculating the total Base Bid. This item
will be treated as a contingency, against which the Owner, at his discretion, may
direct work not shown on the plans, or require other additional work which falls
within the general scope work for the project, as approved in writing from the
Owner. The final project change order shall include all additional costs approved
under the contingency. This item is for contingency if required during the course
of the project to facilitate the project, and will be paid only after written
authorization to include the item in the progress payments.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TBE Measurement and Payment
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01025.doc 01025-4
u
SECTION 01046
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPINGS AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals
required to modify, alter and/or convert existing structures as shown or specified.
B. Existing structures, piping, and equipment shall be removed and dismantled as
necessary for the installation of the new equipment in accordance with the
requirements herein specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall cut, repair, reuse, excavate, demolish or otherwise remove
parts of the existing structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings,
herein specified, or necessary to permit completion of the work under this
Contract. He shall dispose of surplus materials resulting from the above work in
an approved manner. The above work shall include the cutting of grooves and
chases in existing masonry to permit the proper bonding of new masonry to old,
repointing of existing masonry, the drilling of holes into existing masonry for the
purpose of setting dowel rods, anchor bolts, or other appurtenances, and the
cutting of holes in masonry for the installation of pipe, conduits, and other
appurtenances. The work shall included all necessary cutting and bending of
reinforcing steel, structural steel, or miscellaneous metal work found embedded in
the existing structures.
B. No existing structure, equipment, or appurtenance shall be shifted, cut, removed,
or otherwise altered except with the express approval of and to the extent
approved by the Owner/Engineer.
C. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making
openings in walls and partitions, the Contractor shall take all precautions and use
1 _Cardno TBE Modifications to Existing Structures, Piping, and Equipment
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01046.doc 01046-1
Febrn
all necessary barriers and other protective devices so as not to damage the
structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, not to damage the
structures or contents by falling or flying debris.
D. Materials and equipment removed in the course of making alterations and
additions shall remain the property of the Owner, except that items not
salvageable, as determined by the Engineer and the Owner shall become the
property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him off the site of the work at his
own place of disposal. Operating equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and then
lubricated and greased for protection during prolonged storage.
E. All work of altering existing structures shall be done at such time and in such
manner as will comply with the approved time schedule. So far as possible before
any part of the Work is started, all tools, equipment, and materials shall be
assembled and made ready so that the work can be completed without delay.
F. All workmanship and new materials involved in constructing the alterations shall
conform to the Specifications for the classes of work insofar as such
specifications are applicable.
G. All cutting of existing masonry or other material to provide suitable bonding to
new work shall be done in a manner to meet the requirements of the respective
Section of these Specifications covering the new work. When not covered, the
work shall be carried on in the manner and to extent directed by the
Owner/Engineer.
H. Where holes in existing masonry are required to be sealed, unless otherwise
herein specified, they shall be sealed with cement mortar or concrete. The sides
of the openings shall be provided with keyed joints and shall be suitably
roughened to furnish a good bond and make a watertight joint. All loose or
unsound material adjacent to the opening shall be removed, and if necessary,
replaced with new material. The method of placing the mortar seal shall provide a
suitable means of releasing entrapped air.
1. Surfaces of seals visible in the completed work shall be made to match as nearly
as possible the adjacent surfaces.
J. Nonshrink grout shall be used for setting wall castings, sleeves, doweling anchors
into existing concrete and elsewhere as shown.
3.02 CLEANING EXISTING STRUCTURES
A. Before commencing work on each structure, the Contractor shall remove and
dispose of, away from the site, any sand, sludge, and other solids remaining in
such structures.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TBE Modifications to Existing Structures,,, Piping, and Eauinment
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIPT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01046.doc 01046-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 01090
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Abbreviation and acronyms used in Contract Documents to identify reference standards.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with
requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when
requirements are modified by the Contract Documents, or applicable codes
establish stricter standards.
B. Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contract
Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS, NAMES, AND ADDRESSES OR ORGANIZATIONS
Obtain copies of referenced standards direct from publication source, when needed for
proper performance of Work, or when required for submittal by Contract Documents.
AA Aluminum Association
818 Connecticut Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20006
AASHTO American Association of State
Highway & Transportation Officials
444 North Capitol Street, N.W.
Washington, DC 20001
ACI American Concrete Institute
Box 19150
Redford Station
Detroit, MI 48219
Al Asphalt Institute
Asphalt Institute Building
College Park, MD 20740
Cardno TBE Reference Standards
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSWTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01090.doc 01090-1 Febru;
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
1221 Avenue of the Americas
New York, NY 10020
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
1000 16th Street, N.W.
Washington, DC 20036
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
345 East 47th Street
New York, NY 10017
ASPA American Sod Producers Association
Association Building
Ninth and Minesota
Hastings, NE 68901
ASTM American Society of Testing & Materials
1916 Race Street
Philadelphia, PA 19103
AWWA American Water Works Association
6666 W. Quincy Avenue
Denver, CO 80235
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
1101 Connecticut Avenue
Washington, DC 20036
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
180 North LaSalle Street, Suite 2110
Chicago, IL 60601
FS Federal Specification
General Services Administration
Specifications and Consumer Information
Distribution Section (WFSIS)
Washington Navy Yard, Bldg. 197
Washington, DC 20407
MIL Military Specification
Naval Publications and Forms Center
5801 Tabor Avenue
Philadelphia, PA 19120
Cardno TBE Reference Standards
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01090.doc 01090-2
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
2101 L Street, N.W.
Washington, DC 20037
PCA Portland Cement Association
5420 Old Orchard Road
Skokie, IL 20076
PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
20 North Wacker Drive
Chicago, IL 60606
PS Product Standard
U.S. Department of Commerce
Washington, DC 20203
UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
333 Pfingston Road
Northbrook, 11 60062
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
Cardno TSE Reference Standards
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20 I OTIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01090.doc 01090-3 Febru
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 01310
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
PART1-GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Promptly after award of the Contract, prepare and submit to Engineer estimated
construction progress schedules for the Work, with subschedules of related
activities which are essential to its progress.
B. Submit revised progress schedules to maintain proposed schedule within 30 days
of work in place.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Conditions of the Contract.
B. Section 01010: Summaryof Work.
C. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Produce Data, and Samples.
1.03 FORM OF SCHEDULES
A. Prepare schedules in the form of
1. Horizontal Bar Chart.
2. Network Analysis System.
3. Other Method Accepted by Owner.
B. Format of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work.
1.04 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES
A. Construction Progress Schedule:
1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity.
2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of each major element
of construction. Specifically list:
a) Site clearing.
b) Site utilities.
C) Foundation work.
d) Structural framing.
e) Subcontractor work.
f) Equipment installations.
g) Delivery of O & M Manuals.
Cardno TBE Construction Schedules
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSWTILITY PROJECTS\20 I O\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01310.doc 01310-1 Febru
h) Finishings.
i) Start-up
B. Submittals, Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. Show:
1. The dates for Contractor's Submittals.
2. The dates revised submittals will be required from the Engineer.
C. Provide subschedules to define critical portions of prime schedules.
1.05 PROGRESS REVISIONS
A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission.
B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule:
1. Major changes in scope.
2. Activities modified since previous submission.
3. Revised projections of progress and completion.
4. Other identifiable changes.
C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define:
1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.
2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect.
3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors.
1.06 SUBMISSIONS
A. Submit initial schedules within 10 days after the effective date of the Agreement.
1. Engineer will review schedules and return review copy within 10 days
after receipt.
2. If required, resubmit within seven days after return of review copy.
B. With each application for payment, submit progress schedule if revised since last
payment request.
C. Submit one reproducible transparency which will be returned to the Contractor,
plus two copies which will be retained by the Engineer.
1.07 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to:
1. Job site file.
2. Subcontractors.
3. Other concerned parties.
Cardno TBE Construction Schedules 1
S:\Engiri\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01310.doc 01310-2 Februan
1
B. Instruct recipients to report promptly to the Contractor, in writing, any problems
anticipated by the projections shown in the schedules.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
Cardno TBE Construction Schedules
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSWILITY PROJEG I'S\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01310.doc 01310-3 Febru
CO
a
N
fA
C
Mca
W
^ca
A
cc
W
a? N a
00
0 V/
J J
a?
N
4
Ll.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 -
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Q; c
00-
U)
¢w
I ;
I
I i
a N
°
vi
J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
N d
N S 2
J
I
I
I
I
I
I
N fq
0 is
+? N
a?
v
N
a
SECTION 01340
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
1 Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples required by Contract Documents.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Definitions and Additional Responsibilities of Parties: Conditions of the
Contract.
B. Section 01700 Contract Closeout.
t
1.1
1
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit detailed and dimensioned working
shop drawings showing the construction of the proposed facility and installation
of all equipment complete in every respect. Each drawing shall be indexed and/or
referenced to the Contract Drawings and Specifications. No work upon the
manufacture or fabrication of any equipment shall be performed until the
Engineer has reviewed and returned the shop drawings marked with "make
corrections as noted or no exceptions taken." The Contractor shall also submit
layout drawings showing exact installation, piping and details for the units being
submitted.
B. The Contractor shall review, approve and sign all shop drawings. Contractor is
responsible for dimensions and field conditions. Any deviations from plans or
specifications shall be clearly shown.
C. Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner.
D. Details shall be identified by reference of sheet and detail or schedule.
E. Minimum sheet size: 8-1/2 X 11 inches.
1.04 PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation
1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models.
2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and clearances required.
Cardno TSE Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
SAEngin\ENGWEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01340.doc 01340-1 Febru
4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
B. Manufacture's standard schematic drawings and diagrams:
1. Modify drawings and diagrams by deleting information which is not
applicable to the work.
2. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically
applicable to the work.
1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples prior to submission.
B. Determine and verify:
1. Field measurements.
2. Field construction criteria.
3. Catalog numbers and similar data.
4. Conformance with specifications.
C. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the Work and of the Contract
Documents.
D. Notify the Engineer in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations in the
submittals from requirements of the contract Documents.
E. Begin no fabrication or work which requires approved submittals until return of
submittals by Engineer
1.06 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make submittals in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work.
B. Number of submittals required:
1. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit four (4) copies.
2. Samples: Submit the quantity stated in each specification section.
C. Submittals shall contain:
1. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions.
2. The Project title and number.
3. Contract identification.
4. The names of.
a) Contractor
b) Supplier
c) Manufacturer
5. Identification of the product, with the specification section number.
6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.
Cardno TBE Shop Drawings. Product Data, and Samples
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\L1FT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01340.doc 01340-2
1
' 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers.
9. Identifications of deviations from Contract Documents.
10. Identification of revisions on resubmittals.
' 11. An 8-inch X 3.5-inch blank space for Contractor and Engineer stamps.
12. CONTRACTOR'S stamp intitialed or signed, certifying to review of
submittal, verification of products, field measurements and field
construction criteria and coordination of the information within the
submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents.
1.07 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make any corrections or changes in the submittals noted by the Engineer and
resubmit unless otherwise noted.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
' 1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial
submittal.
2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those suggested by
the Engineer.
C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
1.08 ENGINEER'S DUTIES
' A. Review submittals within 14 days or in accord with the schedule.
' B. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate status of submittal.
C. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or resubmission.
' D. Review initial submittals and one resubmittal. Resubmittals that cannot be
approved will be returned. Additional resubmittals will be reviewed by the
' Engineer, and costs for time and materials for reviewing resubmittals will be back
charged by the Engineer to the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TSE Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01340.doc 01340-3
Febru
0
Z
00
C
m
++
N
L
U)
L
c
a
w
z
a?
0
cD C?
T
T
'"')
2
2
r-ce)
- EL
y
[n U? Cn LL
J J .J
d N
? T T
._._._.-. _._._._. ........_
J
? d ? ? 4 ?
I d vi I
I
r T Z r = T T T
C6 uj C6
J J J ; I
I
?
? I
I
I
I
i I
I
I
I
C
2
N
W
C1
SECTION 01370
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
' PART 1-GENERAL
1
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
' A. Submit to the Engineer a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of
the Work, within ten days after award of contract.
' B. Upon the request of the Engineer, support the values with data which will
substantiate their correctness.
' C. The Schedule of Values, unless objected to by the Engineer, shall be used only as
the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment.
' D. Related Requirements in Other Parts of the Contract Documents.
1. Agreement
' 2. General Conditions
3. Supplementary Conditions
' 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01600: Material and Equipment.
1.03 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES
' A. Type schedule on 8-1/2-inch X 11-inch white paper; Contractor's standard forms
and automated printout will be considered for approval by Engineer upon
Contractors request. Identify schedule with:
' 1. Title of Project, location and (City, County, Owner) Project Number.
2. Engineer and Engineer's Project number.
3. Name and Address of Contractor.
' 4. Date of Submission.
B. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the Work, in
' sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments
during construction.
' C. Follow the table of contents of these Specifications as the format for listing
component items.
' 1. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major
section of the specifications.
Cardno TBE Schedule of Values
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01370.doc 01370-1 Febru,
1
D. For each major line item list sub-values of:
1. Major products or operations under the item.
2. Contract conditions, such as: bonds, insurance premiums, job ,
mobilization, construction facilities and temporary controls.
E. For the various portions of the Work: '
1. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's
overhead and profit.
2. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored
materials, break down the value into:
a. The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid.
b. The total installed value.
F. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum.
1.04 SUBSCHEDULE OF UNIT MATERIAL VALUES '
A. Submit a subschedule of unit costs and quantities for: '
1. Products specified under a unit cost allowance in Section 01020.
2. Products on which progress payments will be requested for stored
products. '
B. The form of submittal shall parallel that of the Schedule of Values, with each item
identified the same as the line item in the Schedule of Values.
C. The unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste.
D. The unit values for the materials shall be broken down into: '
1. Cost of the material, delivered and unloaded at the site, with taxes paid.
2. Installation costs, including Contractor's overhead and profit. '
E. The installed unit value multiplied by the quantity listed shall equal the cost of
that item in the Schedule of Values.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS '
Not Used.
'
PART 3 - EXECUTION
'
Not Used.
END OF SECTION '
Cardno TBIE Schedule of Values I
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSMILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01370.doc 01370-2 Februan
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required for construction, remove
on completion of Work.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01010: Summaryof Work
1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with National Electric Code
B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and regulations and with utility
company requirements
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required
usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of
applicable codes and standards.
2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A. Arrange with utility company, provide service required for power and lighting,
and pay all costs for service and for power used.
B. Install circuit and branch wiring, with area distribution boxes located so that
power and lighting is available throughout the construction by the use of
construction-type power cords.
C. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not
adequate for work, and for areas accessible to the public.
Cardno_TBE Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
S:\EnRin\ENGINEFRING PROJECTSVULITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01500.doc 01500-1 Febru
2.03 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION
A. Provide temporary heat and ventilation as required to maintain adequate
environmental conditions to facilitate progress of the Work, to meet specified
minimum conditions for the installation of materials, and to protect materials and
finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity.
B. Provide adequate forced ventilation of enclosed areas for curing of installed
materials, to disperse humidity, and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust,
fumes, vapors or gases.
C. Portable heaters shall be standard approved units complete with controls.
D. Pay all costs of installation, maintenance, operation and removal, and for fuel
consumed.
2.04 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Arrange with local telephone service company to provide direct line telephone
service at the construction site. Service required:
1. One direct line instrument in Field Office of Contractor.
2. Other instruments at the option of the contractor, or as required by
regulations.
B. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges for 1
local calls. Toll charges shall be paid by the party who places the call.
2.05 TEMPORARY WATER
A. Provide water for construction and potable purposes; pay all costs for installation,
maintenance and removal.
B. The Contractor will pay for all water used and pay for applicable deposits.
C. Make conservative use of water.
D. Water will be supplied via a hydrant meter. The contractor is to acquire a hydrant
construction meter through Customer Service and pay for any water used during
construction.
E. All connections to hydrants to be made by Owner's personnel.
F. Non-potable water for general construction purposes shall be clean, non-turbid,
and non-saline; and acceptable to the Engineer.
G. Water utilization for concrete plaster and mortar shall meet the respective
Cardno TBE Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
S:\Engin\ENGTNEERTNG PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01500.duc 01500-2
1 requirements and standards set forth for water utilized in these construction
materials.
H. The Owner will make water available at designated hydrants on the Owner's
water system for use by the Contractor.
' 2.06 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations.
B. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures.
' C. Existing plumbing facilities shall not be used by construction personnel.
2.07 TEMPORARY ACCESS ROAD AND PARKING
A. Site Access Roads:
1. Construct new temporary access roads over designated easements from
public thoroughfare to site entrance.
B. On-Site Roads and Parking Areas:
1. Locate roads, drives, walks and parking facilities to provide uninterrupted
access to construction offices, mobilization, work, storage areas, and other
areas required for execution of the contract.
2. Submit proposed location for Engineer's approval.
3. Provide access for emergency vehicles.
a. Maintain driveways a minimum of 15 feet wide, between and
around combustible materials in storage and mobilization areas.
4. Maintain traffic areas free as possible of excavated materials, construction
equipment, products and debris.
5. Keep fire hydrants and water control valves free from obstruction and
accessible for use.
6. Provide traffic control devices as required by governing authorities along
established public thoroughfares which will be used as haul routes to site
access.
2.08 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. Noise Control:
1. Sound levels measured by the City personnel shall not exceed 65 dBA
6PM to 7 AM or 80 dBA 7 AM to 6PM within twenty feet of the
boundaries of the site. Sound levels in excess of these values are
sufficient cause to have the work halted until equipment noise can be
lowered to these levels. Work stoppage by the City for excessive noise
shall not relieve the Contractor of the other portions of this specification
' Cardno TBE Construction Facilities and TetnRorary Controls
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01500.doc 01500-3
Feb u
including, but not limited to completion of all work within specified
contract time and contract price.
2. If mufflers cannot achieve the necessary noise reduction, noise abatement
shall be accomplished by the Contractor's installation of baffles (or other
acceptable means) positioned to break line-of-sight from the noise source
to affected residences and/or commercial structures. Minimum noise
abatement measures shall consist of equipping all engines with hospital
grade mufflers or silencers.
B. Dust Control:
1. Provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize
raising dust from construction operations, and provide positive means to
prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into the atmosphere.
C. Water Control:
1. Provide methods to control surface water to prevent damage to the Project,
the site, or adjoining properties.
a. Control fill, grading and ditching to direct surface drainage away
from excavations, pits, tunnels and other construction areas; and to
direct drainage to proper runoff.
2. Provide, operate and maintain hydraulic equipment of adequate capacity to
control surface water.
3. Dispose of drainage water in a manner to prevent flooding, erosion, or
other damage to any portion of the site or to adjoining areas.
D. Pest Control:
Not Used
E. Rodent Control:
1. Provide rodent control as necessary to prevent infestation of construction
or storage area.
a. Employ methods and use materials which will not adversely affect
conditions at the site or on adjoining properties.
b. Should the use of rodenticides be considered necessary, submit an
informational copy of the proposed program to Owner with a copy
to Engineer. Clearly indicate:
1) The area or areas to be treated.
2) The rodenticides to be used, with a copy of the
manufacturer's printed instructions.
3) The pollution preventative measures to be employed.
2. The use of any rodenticide shall be in full accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations.
Cairdno TBE _ Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSMILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01500.doc 01500-4
1
1
F. Debris Control:
1. Maintain all areas under Contractor's control free of extraneous debris.
2. Initiate and maintain a specific program to prevent accumulation of debris
at construction site, storage and parking areas, or along access roads and
haul routes.
a. Provide acceptable containers for deposit of debris.
b. Prohibit overloading of trucks to prevent spillages on access and
haul routes.
1) Provide periodic inspection of traffic areas to enforce
requirements.
3. Schedule periodic collection and disposal of debris.
a. Provide additional collections and disposals of debris whenever the
periodic schedule is inadequate to prevent accumulation.
G. Pollution Control:
1. Provide methods, means and facilities required to prevent contamination
of soil, water or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from
construction operations.
2. Provide equipment and personnel, perform emergency measures required
to contain any spillages, and to remove contaminated soils or liquids.
a. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off-site, and
replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil.
3. Take special measure to prevent harmful substances from entering public
waters.
a. Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals, or other such
substances adjacent to streams, or in sanitary or storm sewers.
4. Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants.
a. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals.
b. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere.
H. Erosion Control:
1. Plan and execute construction and earth work by methods to control
surface drainage from cuts and fills, and from borrow and waste disposal
areas, to prevent erosion and sedimentation.
a. Hold the areas of bare soil exposed at one time to a minimum.
b. Provide temporary control measures such as berms, dikes and
drains.
2. Construct fills land waste areas by selective placement to eliminate surface
silts or clays which will erode.
3. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect any evidence of the start of
erosion, apply corrective measures as required to control erosion.
Cardno TBE Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECrS\20IO\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01500.doc 01500-5 Febru.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Division 15 _ Mechanical, and
in Division 16 - Electrical.
S. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service.
C. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires.
3.02 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no
longer required.
S. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary
facilities.
C. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified condition.
1. Prior to final inspection, remove temporary lamps and install new lamps.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TSE _ Construction Facilities and Temnormy Controls
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01500.doc 01500-6
1
SECTION 01570
TRAFFIC CONTROL
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide, operate and maintain equipment, services and personnel, with traffic
control and protective devices, as required to expedite vehicular traffic flow
around the construction area.
B. Remove temporary equipment and facilities when no longer required, restore
grounds to original, or to specified conditions.
1.02 REFERENCES
Traffic regulation shall be in accordance with F.D.O.T. Roadway and Traffic Design
Standards Series 600, latest Ed., Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, latest Ed.,
and FDOT Standard Specifications, latest Ed.
1.03 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
A. The Contractor is to prepare a traffic control plan and/or policy statement for each
phase of construction. This plan is to be presented to the City Engineer at or
before the pre-construction meeting.
B. All proposed traffic control plans and policy statements shall be complete and in
compliance with Section 1.02.
1.04 TRAFFIC SIGNALS AND SIGNS
A. Provide and operate traffic control and directional signals required to direct and
maintain an orderly flow of traffic in all areas under Contractor's control, or
affected by Contractor's operations.
B. Provide traffic control and direction signs, post mounted, at all areas required by
Section 1.02.
C. Traffic Signals - Construction requiring traffic signal modification shall be
reported to the City Engineer at least 72 hours prior to the commencement of such
activities. All excavation work within 30 feet of any traffic signal shall be
reported to the City Engineer at least 72 hours prior to its commencement.
Cardno TBE Traffic Control
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSMILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01570.doc 01570-1 Febru
D. All existing traffic signs shall remain visible throughout construction activities '
unless superseded by required construction signing.
1.05 FLAGMEN
A. Provide qualified and suitably equipped flagmen when construction
operations encroach on traffic lanes, as required for regulation of traffic (See
Section 1.02).
1.06 FLARES AND LIGHTS
A. Provide lights as required by Section 1.02.
1. To clearly delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic as required in Section
1.02
2. For use by flagmen in directing traffic.
11
B. Provide illumination of critical traffic and parking areas as required in Section
1.02. 1
1.07 CONSTRUCTION PARKING CONTROL
A. Control vehicular parking to preclude interference with public traffic or parking,
access by emergency vehicles, Owner's operations, or construction operations.
B. Monitor parking of construction personnel's private vehicles.
1. Maintain free vehicular access to and through parking areas and
driveways.
2. Prohibit parking on or adjacent to access roads, or in non-designated areas.
1.08 CONSTRUCTION VEHICLES
A. All slow moving construction vehicles shall have a slow moving sign visible from
the rear of the vehicle.
B. All vehicles used for construction activities shall have audible back-up warning
devices.
1.09 ROAD CLOSURES
A. No road shall be closed prior to receiving approval from the City Engineer.
B. At least seven days prior to a proposed road closure, the contractor shall submit to
the City Engineer a complete traffic control plan. This plan shall include the
following minimum information:
1. Sketch of work site and all area roads, streets and mark driveways.
2. Proposed detour route.
Cardno TBE Traffic Control
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01570.doc 01570-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3. All necessary traffic control devices to be used.
4. Emergency contractor contact person name and phone to be available 24
hours a day.
5. Estimated times/dates of road closure.
C. The City Engineer shall have the authority to approve an emergency road closure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. All traffic control devices shall meet or exceed FDOT certification standards.
B. All traffic signs shall have high intensity face material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Upon notification by the owner either verbally or in writing, the contractor shall
correct any noted deficiencies within one hour.
B. Inspection of all traffic control items shall be accomplished at least twice per day.
One of these inspections shall be at the end of the workday or at night.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TBE Traffic Control
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\0I570.doc 01570-3 Febru.
t
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Products.
B. Workmanship.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions.
D. Transportation and Handling.
E. Storage and Protection
F. Substitutions and Product Options.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01010: Summaryof Work.
B. Section 01090: Reference Standards.
C. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
D. Section 01700: Contract Closeout.
1.03 PRODUCTS
A. Products include material, equipment, and systems.
B. Comply with Specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements.
C. Components required to be supplied in quantity within a Specification section
shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable.
1.04 WORKMANSHIP
A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances of
specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise
workmanship.
Cardno TBE Material and Equipment
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01600_doc 01600-1 Fehru;
B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship for specified quality.
C. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
withstand stresses, vibration, and racking.
1.05 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When work is specified to comply with manufacturer's instructions, submit copies
as specified in Section 01340, and distribute copies to persons involved, and
maintain one set in field office.
B. Perform work in accordance with details of instructions and specified
requirements. Should a conflict exist between Specifications and instructions,
consult with the Engineer.
1.06 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products, including those
provided by Owner, by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or
packaging.
B. Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent scraping,
marring or otherwise damaging products or surrounding surfaces.
C. Handle products by methods to prevent bending or overstressing.
D. Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points.
1.07 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and
labels intact and legible. Store sensitive Products in weather-tight enclosures and
maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's
instructions.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on supports above ground.
Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; and
provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
C. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
D. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure
Products are undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions.
Cardno TBE Material and Eauinment
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01600.doc 01600-2
E. After installation, provide coverings to protect Products from damage from traffic
and construction operations. Remove when no longer needed.
F. During such periods of time that are designated by the United States Weather
Bureau as being a hurricane warning or alert, construction materials or equipment
shall be secured against displacement by wind forces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
Cardno TBE _ Material and Equipment
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01600.doe 01600-3 Febni
1
[1
1
SECTION 01650
STARTING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART1-GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide material and labor required to perform start-up of each respective item of
equipment and system. Start-up shall include: adjustment and balance
procedures.
1. Provide information and assistance required, cooperate with test, adjust
and balance services.
B. Comply strictly with specified procedures in starting up mechanical systems.
C. Provide Factory Service Representative to check equipment and certify to its
proper installation prior to start-up and during start-up and testing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Each Specification Section as Applicable.
1.03 START-UP PROCEDURES
' A. Bearings:
1. Inspect for cleanliness, clean and remove foreign materials.
2. Verify alignment.
3. Replace defective bearings, and those which run rough or noisy.
4. Grease as necessary, and in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Drives:
1. Adjust tension in V-belt drives, and adjust varipitch sheaves and drives for
proper equipment speed.
2. Adjust drives for alignment of sheaves and V-belts.
3. Clean, remove foreign materials before starting operation.
' C. Motors:
1. Check each motor for amperage comparison to nameplate value.
2. Correct conditions which produce excessive current flow, and which exist
' due to equipment malfunction.
' D. Pumps:
1. Check mechanical seals for cleanliness and adjustment before running
PUMP-
1 Cardno TBE Startine of Mechanical Svstems
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20I0\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01650.doc 01650-1 Febru
2. Inspect shaft sleeves for scoring.
3. Inspect mechanical faces, chambers, and seal rings, replace if defective.
4. Verify that piping system is free of dirt and scale before circulating liquid
through the pump.
E. Control Valves:
1. Inspect both hand and automatic control valves, clean bonnets and stems.
2. Tighten packing glands to assure no leakage, but permit valve sterns to
operate without galling.
3. Replace packing in valves to retain maximum adjustment after system is
judged complete.
4. Replace packing on any valve which continues to leak.
5. Remove and repair bonnets which leak.
6. Coat packing gland threads and valve steins with a surface preparation of
"Moly-Cate", "Fel-Pro", or equal after cleaning.
7. Verify that control valve seats are free from foreign material and are
properly positioned for intended service.
F. Tighten flanges after system has been placed in operation. 1
1. Replace flange gaskets which show any sign of leakage after tightening.
G. Inspect screwed joints for leakage.
1. Promptly remake each joint which appears to be faulty, do not wait for
rust to form.
2. Clean threads on both parts, apply compound and remake joints.
H. After systems have been placed in operation, clean strainers, dirt pockets, orifices,
valve seats and headers in fluid systems, to assure being free of foreign materials.
I. Open air vents, remove operation elements.
1. Clean thoroughly, replace internal parts and put back into operation.
J. Set and calibrate draft guages of air filters and other equipment.
K. Inspect fan wheels for clearance and balance.
1. Provide factory-authorized personnel for adjustment when needed.
L. Check each electrical control circuit to assure that operation complies with
specifications and requirements to provide desired performance.
M. Inspect each pressure gauge and thermometer for calibration.
1. Replace items which are defaced, broken, or which read incorrectly.
N. Repair damaged insulation.
Cardno TBE Startine of Mechanical Systems
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01650.doc 01650-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0. Vent gases trapped in any part of systems.
1. Verify that liquids are drained from all parts of gas or air systems.
P. Check piping for leaks at every joint, and at every screwed, flanged, or welded
connection, using "Leak-Tek" or other approved compound.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
Cardno TBE Starting of Mechanical Systems
S:\Engin\ENGINEERiNG PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01650.doc 01650-3 Febru,
1
I]
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Substantial Completion
B. Final inspection after completion
C. Final cleaning
1
fl
1-1
1
D. Contractor's closeout submittals
E. Final adjustment of accounts
1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. When CONTRACTOR considers work has reached substantial completion, he
shall submit to the ENGINEER the following:
1. Written notice that the work is substantially complete in accordance with
Contract Documents.
2. A list of items yet to be completed or corrected and explanations thereof.
B. Within a reasonable time upon receipt of such notice, the ENGINEER will make
an inspection, if necessary, to determine the status of completion.
C. Should the ENGINEER determine that the work is not substantially complete:
1. The ENGINEER will promptly notify the CONTRACTOR in writing,
giving the reasons thereof.
2. CONTRACTOR shall remedy the deficiencies in the work and send a
second written notice of Substantial Completion to the ENGINEER.
3. Upon receipt of the second notice, the ENGINEER will reinspect the
Work.
D. When the ENGINEER finds that the Work is substantially complete he will issue
a Certificate of Substantial Completion with a tentative list of items to be
completed or corrected before final inspection.
1.03 FINAL INSPECTION AFTER COMPLETION
A. When CONTRACTOR considers the Work is complete with all minor
deficiencies completed or corrected, he shall submit written certification that:
Cardno TBE Contract Closeout
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01700.doc 01700-1
Febm
1
1. Contract Document requirements have been met. ,
2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
4. All minor deficiencies have been corrected or completed and the Work is
ready for final inspection.
5. Project record documents are complete and submitted. ,
B. Within a reasonable time upon receipt of such certification, the ENGINEER will
make an inspection to verify the status of completion.
C. Should the ENGINEER determine that the work is incomplete or defective:
1. The ENGINEER will promptly notify the CONTRACTOR in writing,
listing the incomplete or defective work.
2. CONTRACTOR shall remedy the deficiencies in the work and send a
second written certification to the ENGINEER that the Work is complete.
3. Upon receipt of the second certification, the ENGINEER will reinspect the
Work.
D. When the ENGINEER determines that the work is acceptable, under the Contract ,
Documents, he shall request the CONTRACTOR to make closeout submittals.
1.04 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute prior to final inspection.
B. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean other surfaces.
C. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the
Project and from the site.
1.05 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents
1. At Contract closeout, submit documents with transmittal letter containing
date, Project title, CONTRACTOR'S name and address, list of documents,
and signature of CONTRACTOR.
2. Drawings; Legibly marked to record actual construction:
a) Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
Data shall be in State Plane coordinates utilizing the North
American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American
Vertical Datum of 1988.
b) Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a surveyor registered in the
State of Florida.
C) One signed and sealed project set, plus two additional signed and
sealed sets for each permitted utility shall be submitted to the City.
Cardno TBE Contract Closeout
S:\Engin\ENGrNEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJLCTS\2010\LIPT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01700.doc 01700-2
d) Record Drawings should also be submitted to the City on disk in
Awg (Autodesk AutoCADD Release 14 or later).
3. Specifications and Addenda; Legibly mark each Section to record.
4. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
B. Evidence of payment and Release of Liens.
1.06 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer.
B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum.
1. The original Contract sum.
2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
a) Previous change orders or written amendment.
b) Allowances
c) Unit prices
d) Deductions for uncorrected work.
e) Penalties and bonuses
f) Deductions for liquidated damages
g) Other adjustments
3. Total Contract Sum as adjusted
4. Previous payments
5. Sum remaining due
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
Cardno TBE Contract Closeout
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSMILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01700.doc 01700-3 Febru
1
1
1
SECTION 01730
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's
maintenance and operations of products specified.
1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as
referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications.
B. Provide Factory Service Representative to instruct Owner's personnel in
maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems.
C. Provide Operation and Maintenance Data Sufficient to meet EPA Operation and
Maintenance Manual Requirements.
1 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples.
B. Section 01700: Contract Closeout.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preparation of data shall be done by factory personnel:
1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described
products.
2. Familiar with requirements of this Section.
3. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential
data.
4. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings.
5. Familiar with EPA Operation and Maintenance Manual requirements.
1.04 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
B. Provide three (3) preliminary review copies for Engineer's review and acceptance
per Section 01340. Upon acceptance, submit five (5) final copies in boxes
indicating contents.
Cardno TBE OmminQ and Maintenance Data
SAEngin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010U.IFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01730.doc 01730-1 Febru
1
C. Format:
1. Size: 8-1/2 inches X I 1 inches.
2. Paper: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten.
3. Drawings:
a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text.
b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
4. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating
equipment.
a. Provide typed description of product, and major component parts
of equipment.
b. Provide indexed tabs.
5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING
AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS." List:
a. Title and Project.
b. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
C. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
t
s
D. Binders: ,
1. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic
covers.
2. Maximum ring size: Three inch.
3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent
groupings.
1.05 CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic
order.
1. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the
volume.
2. List, with each product, name, address and telephone number of:
a. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
b. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
3. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as
set forth in Contract Documents.
B. Product Data:
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed.
b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
C. Delete references to inapplicable information.
C. Drawings
1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
Cardno TBE _ Oneratine and Maintenance Data
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01730.doc 01730-2
1
b. Control of flow diagrams.
D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
Provide logical sequence of instruction for each procedure.
E. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel:
a. Proper procedures in event of failure.
b. Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
' 1.06 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
Not Used.
1.07 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
1
1
1
1
A. Submit ten copies of complete manual in final form.
B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
1. Description of unit and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
C. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts.
2. Operating procedures.
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency
instructions.
C. Summer and winter operating instructions.
d. Special operating instructions.
3. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "Trouble-shooting.
C. Disassembly, repair and re-assembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
4. Servicing and lubricants required.
a. List of lubricants required.
5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and
diagrams required for maintenance.
a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
b. Items recommended to be stocked as parts.
8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
Cardno TBE atin and Maintenance Data
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01730.doc 01730-3 Febru
C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:
I . Description of system and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
C. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts.
2. Circuit directories of panel boards.
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
C. Communications.
3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
4. Operating procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
C. Special operating instructions.
5. Maintenance procedures:
a. Routing operations.
b. Guide to trouble shooting.
C. Disassembly, repair and re-assembly.
d. Adjustment and checking.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices,
and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
8. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications.
D. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent
during instruction of Owner's personnel.
E. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective Sections
of Specifications.
F. Provide complete information for products specified in:
1. Section 11305: Submersible Sewage Pumps, Controls and Panels.
2. Section 16051: Electrical Work - Sewage Pumping Station.
3. Other items as may be individually specified within the sections.
1.08 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to 50
percent completion of project.
B. Changes and Corrections to approved data due to construction adjustments shall
be submitted prior to substantial completion of the project.
Cardno TBE Operating and Maintenance Data
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20I O\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01730.doc 01730-4
s
i
1.09 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, provide Factory Representative to fully
instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation,
adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems.
B. Operating and Maintenance Manual shall constitute the basis of instruction.
1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all
aspects of operations and maintenance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TBE Operating and Maintenance Data
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSMILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\01730.doc 01730-5 Febru
1
u
SECTION 02220
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
PART 1- GENERAL
A. The work included under this Section consists of clearing, excavating, backfilling
and grading required for the construction of the structure(s) as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Definitions:
1. Maximum Density: Maximum weight in pounds per cubic foot of a
specific material.
2. Optimum Moisture: Percentage of water in a specific material at
maximum density.
3. Rock Excavation: Excavation of any hard natural substance which
required the use of explosives and/or special impact tools such as jack
hammers, sledges, chisels or similar devices specifically designed for use
in cutting or breaking rock, but exclusive of trench excavating machinery.
C. Plan For Excavation: The Contractor shall be responsible for having determined
to his satisfaction, prior to the submission of his bid, the conformation of the
ground, the character and quality of the substrata, the types and quantities of
materials to be encountered, the nature of the groundwater conditions, the
prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other matters
which can in any way affect the work under this Contract. At the pre-construction
conference, the Contractor shall submit a plan of the proposed operations to the
Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall consider, and his plan for excavation
shall reflect, the equipment and methods to be employed in the excavation. The
prices established in the Proposal for the work to be done will reflect all costs
pertaining to the work. No claims for extras based on substrata or groundwater
table conditions will be allowed.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. A Testing Laboratory retained by the Contractor will make such tests as are
deemed advisable. The Contractor shall schedule his work so as to permit a
reasonable time for testing before placing succeeding lifts and shall keep the
laboratory informed of his progress.
1 Cardno THE Structure Excavation and Backfill
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20I OUFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02220.doc 02220-1
Febru
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ,
NOT USED '
PART 3 - EXECUTION '
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clearing: '
1. The construction site shall be cleared of all obstructions and vegetation,
including large roots and undergrowth, within 10-feet of the lines of
excavation.
2. Strip and stockpile topsoil.
B. Removals: Complete all removals within the lines of excavation prior to
beginning excavation.
3.02 PERFORMANCE
A. Excavation:
The Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description and of whatever t
substances encountered, to the dimensions required for construction and as
specified herein. All excavations shall be made by open cut.
Walls of the excavation shall be kept vertical and, if required to protect the safety
of workmen, the general public, this or other work or structures, or excavation
walls, the excavation shall be properly sheeted and braced. Excavation for the '
structures shall be sufficient to provide a clearance between their outer surfaces
and the face of the excavation, sheeting, or bracing, of not less than 2-feet.
Materials encountered in the excavation which have a tendency to slough or flow '
into the excavation, undermine the banks, weaken the overlying strata, or are
otherwise rendered unstable by the excavation operation shall be retained by
sheeting, stabilization, grouting or other approved methods. Excavation for '
precast or prefabricated structures will not be required to be dewatered.
Excavation for the precast or prefabricated structures shall be carried to an
,
elevation 1-foot lower than the proposed outside bottom of the structure to
provide space for the select backfill material. Prior to placing the select backfill,
the excavation shall be sounded, if not dewatered, using a rigid pole to indicate to '
the satisfaction of the Engineer that the excavation has been carried to the proper
depth and is reasonably uniform over the area to be occupied by the structure. t
Cardno TBE Structure Excavation and Backfill 1
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20I0\I.IFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02220.doc 02220-2 Februan
Excavation for structures constructed or cast in place in dewatered excavations
shall be carried down to the bottom of the structure where dewatering methods are
such that a dry excavation bottom is exposed and the naturally occurring material
' at this elevation leveled and left ready to receive construction. Material disturbed
below the founding elevation in dewatered excavations shall be replaced with
Class B concrete.
fl
Footings: Cast-in-place concrete footing sides shall be formed immediately after
excavation. Forming for footing sides is specified elsewhere.
B. Dewatering (When Required): Any water which accumulates in the excavations
for cast-in-place concrete structures shall be removed promptly by well point
system or by other means satisfactory to the Engineer in such a manner as to not
create a nuisance to adjacent property or public thoroughfare. Pumps and engines
for well point systems shall be operated with mufflers and at a minimum noise
level suitable to a residential area. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
nuisance created due to the disposal of water from his drainage system.
C. Stockpiled Materials: Materials removed from the excavation shall be stored and
disposed of in a manner which will not interfere with traffic at the site. Material
suitable for backfill not needed for backfill at the structure, but needed elsewhere
shall be stockpiled until moved and used elsewhere. Material unsuitable for use
in backfill shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed and
disposed of by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense immediately after
backfill is placed.
D. Backfill:
1. Below Precast or Prefabricated Structures: The space between the
proposed outside bottom of the structure, and the bottom of the excavation
shall be backfilled with graded limerock and screeded level to receive the
proposed structure. If the excavation is not dewatered, after placing and
screeding, the backfill will be sounded with a rigid pole and attached 6-
inch diameter foot piece to indicate, to the satisfaction of the Engineer,
that the backfill has been placed to the proper elevation, is level
throughout and is ready to receive the structure. This final sounding of the
material shall immediately precede setting of the structure.
2. Remainder of Backfill: Selected material from the excavation shall be
used for backfilling around the structure. Trash shall not be allowed to
accumulate in spaces to be backfilled. Backfill around the structure shall
be placed in uniform layers to the level of the water table. Above the
water table, backfill material shall be placed in 8-inch layers and
compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum density as
determined by AASHTO Designation T 180. Backfilling shall be carried
to the finished grades shown on the Drawings.
1 Cardno TBE Structure Excavation and Backfill
SAEngin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20 I O\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02220.doc 02220-3
Febru
E. Foundation Preparation: Slabs On Grade: Subgrades for concrete slabs shall be '
cut, filled and compacted to the required grade. The top 8-inches of concrete slab t
subgrade in cut sections and all fill material shall be compacted to a density of not
less than 95 percent of its maximum density as determined by AASHTO
Designation T 180. ,
END OF SECTION
1
Cardno TBE Structure Excavation and Backfill 1
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02220.doc 02220-4 Februar;
SECTION 02221
TRENCHINGS BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Excavate for all underground piping.
B. Place and compact granular beds and fills over pipelines to rough grade
elevations.
C. Dewater excavations as required.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. 15050 Piping, Fittings, Valves, and Accessories
1.03 SITE COMPACTION TESTING
A. Testing of compacted fill materials will be performed in accordance with
F.D.O.T. and A.A.S.H.T.O. specifications.
B. If, during progress of Work, tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet
specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest as directed by
ENGINEER.
C. Ensure compacted fills are tested before proceeding with placement of surface
materials.
1.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawn, areas to receive planting, rock outcropping and other
features remaining as part of final landscaping.
B. Protect benchmarks and existing structures, roads, sidewalks, paving and curbs
against damage from vehicular or foot traffic. Install and maintain proper
bridging and planking to provide access to buildings.
C. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling underpinning, or by other
methods, as required to prevent cave-ins or loose dirt from falling into
excavations in accordance with Trench Safety Act.
Cardno TBE Trenching, BLckfilliniz, and Compacting
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\0222Ldoc 02221-1
D. Underpin or otherwise support adjacent structure(s) which may be damaged by
excavation work. This includes other utility lines and pipe runs.
E. Notify ENGINEER of any unexpected sub-surface conditions. Discontinue work
in the area until ENGINEER provides notification to resume work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Bedding Materials: Pipe shall be placed on dry, undisturbed earth.
B. Selected Backfill: After pipe joints have been inspected and given preliminary
approval, and sufficient time has elapsed for setting of joints if necessary,
backfilling shall be performed, together with tamping until fill has progressed to
an elevation at least one foot above the top of the pipe bell. During this initial
stage of backfilling, approved granular materials or loose soil free from lumps,
clods, or stones shall be deposited in layers approximately 6-inches thick and
compacted by manually operated machine tampers actuated by compressed air,
or other suitable means. Tampers and machines shall be suitable for the work,
and subject to approval by ENGINEER.
C. Backfill Material: Excavated material, free from roots, rocks larger than 3%
inches in size and building debris.
D. Fill under landscaped areas: Free from alkali, salt, and petroleum products. Use
sub-soil excavated from site only if conforming to specified requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION AND LAYOUT
A. Establish extent of excavation by area and elevation. Designate and identify
datum elevation.
B. Set required lines and levels.
C. Maintain benchmarks, monuments and other reference points.
3.02 UTILITIES
A. Before starting excavation, establish the location and extent of underground
utilities occurring in the work area.
B. Notify ENGINEER if utility lines which are in the way of excavation are
uncovered.
C. Protect active utility services uncovered by excavation.
1
Cardno TBE Trenching, Backfillin and Compacting
'
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20 I O\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\0222Ldoc 02221-2
11
D. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation. Cap, plug or
seal such lines and identify at grade.
E. Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines re-routed or
extended on Project Record Documents.
3.03 TRENCHING
A. Ensure trenching does not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of any
foundation.
B. Excavate in accordance with lines and grades.
C. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable proper installation of pipe and to allow
for inspection. Trim and shape trench bottom and leave free of irregularities,
lumps and projections.
D. Do not disturb soil within branch spread of existing trees or shrubs that are to
remain. If it is necessary to excavate through roots, perform work by hand and
cut roots with a sharp axe.
E. When complete, request ENGINEER to inspect excavations. Correct
unauthorized excavation as directed, at no cost to OWNER.
F. Remove excess or unsuitable excavated sub-soil from site.
1 3.04 DEWATERING
A. Keep trenches dry. Provide necessary equipment including pumps, piping and
temporary drains.
B. Do not discharge drainage water into municipal sewers without municipal
approval. Ensure water discharge does not contain silt held in suspension.
C. A Generic Groundwater Discharge Permit is required for discharging drainage
water into the City's storm system or bodies of water. Groundwater samples
shall be taken and tested by a laboratory before the permit is issued.
D. Direct surface drainage away from excavated areas.
E. Control the grading in and adjacent to excavations to prevent water running into
excavated areas or onto adjacent properties or public thoroughfares.
F. Furnish and operate suitable pumps on a 24 hour basis to keep excavations free
of water until piping has been placed and backfilling has been completed.
Cardno TBE Trenching. Backfilling_and Compacting
S:\Engin\ENGINEER.ING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\0222Ldoc 02221-3
G. No water shall be allowed to rise over masonry or mortar until the concrete or
mortar has set at least 24 hours.
3.05 BACKFILLING
A. Do not start backfilling until piping has been inspected.
B. Ensure trenches are free of building debris, wood, rocks over 3'/2 inches in
diameter and water.
C. Backfill systematically and as early as possible to allow maximum time for
natural settlement and compaction.
D. After backfill has reached a point one foot above the top of the pipe, a variation
in the procedure as to manner of placing and amount of compaction to fill will be
allowed, depending upon the location of the work and danger from subsequent
settlement, as follows:
1. For backfilling in unimproved areas (along utility easements and in
parkway strip beyond the edge of driveways and graveled parking areas),
from an elevation of one foot above top of pipe to the surface of the
ground, backfill may be deposited by equipment. Depositing in layers, or
tamping will not be required. Sufficient surplus excavated material shall
be neatly rounded over the trench, to compensate for settlement. All
surplus excavated materials beyond that indicated above shall be disposed
of by Contractor.
2. For backfilling beneath driveways and parking areas, alleys, and streets
where non-rigid type surfacing is to be replaced. This shall also include
dirt, gravel or asphalt driveways and alleys.
a. The backfill material shall be carefully deposited in uniform layers
not to exceed 12-inches in thickness and each layer shall be
compacted to 98% of maximum density in accordance with
AASHTO T-180 with manually operated machine tampers.
b. In lieu of the foregoing compaction method, the backfill material and
procedure used may be that as specified under Method 3, below.
3. For backfilling across and beneath driveways, sidewalks, parking areas or
streets where a rigid type paving is to be replaced (concrete and asphaltic
concrete and brick surfaces).
a. All backfill material shall be approved granular material of high
weight and density. The material shall be carefully deposited in
uniform layers not to exceed 12-inches thick (loose measure), and
each layer shall be compacted by ramming or tamping with tools
approved by ENGINEER in a manner that does not disturb the pipe.
Cardno TBE _ Trenching. Backfilling. and Compacting
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20 I OUFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\0222Ldoc 02221-4
1
1
1
1
1
1
n
Where necessary, granular base material of the type and thickness
specified shall be used for the last layer prior to surfacing.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TSE Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02221.doc 02221-5
fl
fl
1
SECTION 02532
FIBERGLASS MANHOLE
PART1-PRODUCTS
1.01 GENERAL
A. Fiberglass reinforced polyester manhole shall be manufactured from commercial
grade polyester resin or other suitable polyester or vinyl ester resins, with
fiberglass reinforcements. Manhole shall be a one-piece unit manufactured to
meet or exceed all specifications of ASTM D-3753 latest edition as manufactured
by L.F. Manufacturing, Inc. Giddings, Texas or an approved equal.
1.02 MANUFACTURE
A. Manhole cylinders, manway reducers, and connectors shall be produced from
glass fiber-reinforced polyester resin using a combination of chop and continuous
filament wound process.
B. Interior Access: All manholes shall be designed so that a ladder or step system
can be supported by the installed manhole.
C. Manway Reducer: Manway reducers will be concentric with respect to the larger
portion of the manhole diameters through 60 inches. Larger manholes may have
concentric or eccentric manway reducer openings.
D. Cover and Ring Support: The manhole shall provide an area from which a grade
ring or brick can be installed to accept a typical metal ring and cover and have the
strength to support a traffic load without damage to the manhole.
1.03 TEST METHODS
A. All tests shall be performed as specified in ASTM 3753 latest edition, Section 8.
Test method D-790 and test method D-695.
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL
' A. Each completed manhole shall be examined for dimensional requirements,
hardness, and workmanship. All required ASTM 3753 testing shall be completed
and records of all testing shall be kept and copies of test records shall be
' presented to customer upon formal written request within a reasonable time
period.
1 Cardno TBE Fiberglass Manhole
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION al REPAIRS\02532.doc 02532-1
Febm
1
1.05 CERTIFICATIONS
A. As a basis of acceptance the manufacturer shall provide a independent
certification which consist of a copy of the manufacturer's test report and
accompanied by a copy of the test results that the manhole has been sampled,
tested, and inspected in accordance with the provisions of this specification and
meets all requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RESINS
A. The resins used shall be a commercial grade unsaturated polyester resin or other
suitable polyester or vinyl ester resin. I
2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. The reinforcing materials shall be commercial Grade "E" type glass in the form of
continuous roving, and chop roving, having a coupling agent that will provide a
suitable bond between the glass reinforcement and the resin.
2.03 INTERIOR SURFACING MATERIAL
A. The inner surface exposed to the chemical environment shall be a resin-rich layer
of 0.010 to 0.020 in. thick. The inner surface layer exposed to the corrosive
environment shall be followed with a minimum of two passes of chopped roving
of minimum length 0.5 in. (13 mm) to maximum length of 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) and
shall be applied uniformly to an equivalent weight of 3 oz/ft. Each pass of
chopped roving shall be well-rolled prior to the application of additional
reinforcement. The combined thickness of the inner surface and interior layer
shall not be less than o.10 in. (2.5 mm)
2.04 WALL CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURE
A. After inner layer has been applied the manhole wall shall be constructed with
chop and continuous strand filament wound manufacturing process which insures
continuous reinforcement and uniform strength and composition. The cone
section, if produced separately, shall be affixed to the barrel section at the factory
with resin-glass reinforced joint resulting in a one piece unit. Seams shall be
fiberglassed on the inside and the outside using the same glass-resin jointing
procedure. Field joints shall not be acceptable by anyone except the
manufacturer.
Cardno TBE Fiberglass Manhole
S.\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02532.doc 02532-2
2.05 EXTERIOR SURFACE
' A. For a UV inhibitor the resin on the exterior surface of the manhole shall have gray
pigment added for a minimum thickness .125 in.
' 2.06 STUBOUTS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Upon request stubouts maybe installed. Installation of SDR PVC sewer pipe must
' be performed by sanding, priming, and using resin fiber-reinforced hand layup.
The resin and fiberglass shall be same type and grade as used in the fabrication of
the fiberglass manhole. Inserta-Tee fittings maybe requested and installed per
manufacturer's instructions. Kor-N-Seal boots may be installed by manhole
manufacturer using fiberglass reinforced pipe stubout for Kor-N-Seal boot sealing
surface.
2.07 MANHOLE BOTTOM
' A. Upon request manholes may be required to have resin fiber-reinforced bottom.
Deeper manholes may require a minimum of two fiberglass channel stiffening
ribs. All fiberglass manholes with a fiberglass bottom will have a minimum 3-
inch anti-flotation ring, or anchor lugs as shown on the drawings. Manhole
bottom shall be a minimum of/2-inch thick.
2.08 FIBERGLASS ENCLOSED INVERT AND BENCH AREA
A. Upon request a fiberglass enclosed invert and bench area may be installed in the
' manhole. The invert will be formed using a non-corrosive material and
completely enclosed in a minimum 1/4 inch layer of fiberglass chop.
' 2.09 HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
A. Fiberglass manholes must have the ability to be height adjustable with the use of a
' height adjustment ring. Height adjustment can be made as a field operation
without the use of uncured resins or fiberglass layups. Fiberglass manholes must
maintain all load and soundness characteristics required by A.S.T.M. D3753 after
' height adjustment has occurred.
2.10 FILLERS AND ADDITIVES
' A. Fillers, when used shall be inert to the environment and manhole construction.
Sand shall not be accepted as an approved filler. Additives, such as thixotropic
agents, catalysts, promoters, etc., may be added as required by the specific
manufacturing process to be used to meet the requirements of this standard. The
' resulting reinforced-plastic material must meet the requirements of this
specification.
Cairdno TBE
Fi lass Manhole
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02532.doc 02532-3
Febm
2.11 REQUIREMENTS
A. Exterior Surface: The exterior surface shall be relatively smooth with no sharp
projections. Hand-work finish is acceptable if enough resin is present to eliminate
fiber show. The exterior surface shall be free of blisters larger than 0.5 in. in
diameter, delarnination or fiber show.
B. Interior Surface: The interior surface shall be resin rich with no exposed fibers.
The surface shall be free of crazing, delamination, blisters larger than 0.5 in. in
diameter and wrinkles of 0.125 in. or greater in depth. Surface pits shall be
permitted if they are less than 0.75 in. in diameter and less than 0.0625 deep.
Voids that cannot be broken with finger pressure and that are entirely below the
resin surface shall be permitted if they are less than 0.5 in. in diameter and less
than 0.0625 in. thick.
C. Repairs: Manhole repairs are subject to meet all requirements of this
specification.
D. Manhole Length: Manhole lengths shall be in 6 inches increments +/- 2 inches
E. Diameter Tolerance: Tolerance of inside diameter shall be +/- 1% of required
manhole diameter.
F. Load Rating: The complete manhole shall have a minimum dynamic-load rating
of 16,000 lbf. when tested in accordance with A.S.T.M. 3753 8.4 (note 1). To
establish this rating the complete manhole shall not leak, crack, or suffer other
damage when load tested to 40,000 lbf. and shall not deflect vertically downward
more than 0.25 in. at the point of load application when loaded to 24,000 lb.
G. Stiffness: The manhole cylinder shall have the minimum pipe-stiffness values ,
shown in table below when tested in accordance with A.S.T.M. 3753 8.5 (note 1)
LENGTH - FT FAY - PSI ,
3 - 6.5 0.75
7 - 12.5 1.26 '
13 - 20.5 2.01
21 - 25.5 3.02 '
26-35 5.24
A. Soundness: In order to determine soundness, apply an air or water pressure test to '
the manhole test sample. Test pressure shall not be less than 3 psig or greater than
5 psig. While holding at the established pressure, inspect the entire manhole for '
leaks. Any leakage through the laminate is cause for failure of the test. Refer to
A.S.T.M. 3753 8.6.
Cardno TBE Fiberglass Manhole
S:\E,ngin\E-NGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02532.doc 02532-4 Februar
1
' B. Chemical Resistance: The fiberglass manhole and all related components shall be
fabricated from corrosion proof material suitable for atmospheres containing
hydrogen sulfide and dilute sulfuric acid as well as other gases associated with the
' wastewater collection system.
2.12 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES:
' Hoop Axial
Direction Direction
Tensile Strength (psi) 18,000 5,000
Tensile Modules (psi) 0.6 x 106 0.7 x 106
Flexural Strength (psi) 26,000 4,500
Flexural Modules (psi) 1.4 x 106 0.7 x 106
Compressive (psi) 18,000 10,000
' 2.13 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION
' A. Each manhole shall be marked on the inside and outside with the following
information:
1. Manufacturer's name or trademark
2. Manufacturer's factory location
3. Manufacturer's serial number
' 4. Total length
PART 3 - EXECUTION
' 3.01 SHIPPING AND HANDLING
' A. Do not drop or impact the fiberglass manhole. Fiberglass manhole may be lifted
by inserting a 4"x 4"x 30" timber into the top of manhole with cable attached or
by a sling or "choker" connection around center of manhole, lift as required. Use
' of chains or cables in contact with the manhole surface is prohibited.
3.02 CONCRETE
A. Fiberglass Bottom: Concrete may be used to form bench area and invert. Also
' concrete may be used on top of anti-flotation ring and around the reducer section
as required for buoyancy.
' B. Concrete Bottom: Lower manhole into wet concrete until it rests at the proper
elevation, with a minimum of 4 in. of fiberglass manhole inserted into the wet
concrete below flow line, then move manhole to plumb. The concrete shall
extend a minimum of one foot from the outside wall of the manhole and a
minimum of 6 in. above incoming lines. On the inside, concrete shall form the
Cardno TBE Fiberglass Manhole
SAEngin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02532_doe 02532-5
Fehrm
1
bench and invert area and rise a minimum of 4 in. above incoming lines. If
required by Engineer concrete may be used around reducer section for buoyancy.
3.03 BACKFILL
A. Backfill Material: Unless shown otherwise on drawings and approved by the
Engineer, sand, crushed stone, or pea gravel shall be used for backfill around the
manhole for a minimum distance of one foot from the outside surface and
extending from the bottom of the excavation to the top of the reducer section.
Suitable material chosen from the excavation may be used for the remainder of
the backfill. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, which will
not readily break down under compaction. This material will be subject to
approval by Engineer.
B. Backfill Procedure: Backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than 12 loose
measure inches and mechanically tamped to 95% Standard Proctor Density,
unless otherwise approved by Engineer. Flooding will not be permitted. Backfill
shall be placed in such a manner as to prevent any wedging action against the
fiberglass manhole structure.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TBE Fiberglass Manhole
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20I O\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02532.doc 02532-6
1
1
1
it
SECTION 02574
PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work includes all labor and materials under this Section for cutting, removing,
protecting and replacing existing pavements of the various types encountered
including roadways, driveways and sidewalks.
B. Permits: The Contractor shall obtain the necessary permits prior to any roadway
work. Additionally, the Contractor shall provide advance notice to the
appropriate authority, as required, prior to construction operations.
C. Protection of Existing Improvements: The Contractor shall be responsible for the
protection of all types of pavements, sidewalks and other improvements within
the work area. All damage to such improvements, as a result of the Contractor's
operations, beyond the limits of the work of pavement replacement as described
herein, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials, including lmerock, bituminous prime and tack coat, and asphaltic
concrete for the above work shall meet the requirements established therefor by
the FDOT Specifications.
1. Limerock shall be Miami or Ocala Limerock.
2. Bituminous prime coat material shall be cutback asphalt Grade RC-70.
3. Bituminous tack coat material shall be emulsified asphalt Grade RS-2.
4. Asphaltic concrete shall be Type S-I or S-III.
5. Concrete material shall be Class I or II, and/or as otherwise required to
meet FDOT specifications.
6. Welded wire fabric, joint reinforcing welded wire fabric shall conform
with ASTM-A185 and ASTM-A615.
Cardno TBE Pavement Removal and Replacement
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJEC'T'S\UTILITY PROJECI'S\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02574.doc 02574-1
Febru
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Pedestrian or school crossings: Where the work crosses or interferes with school
or pedestrian crossings, extreme care shall be taken by the Contractor to insure the
safety of school children or other pedestrians.
3.02 PERFORMANCE
A. Removals:
1. Pavement Removal:
a. Where existing pavement is to be removed, the surfacing shall be
mechanical saw cut prior to trench excavation, leaving a uniform
and straight edge, with minimum disturbance to the remaining
adjacent surfacing. The width of cut for this phase of existing
pavement removal shall be minimal.
b. Immediately following the specified backfilling and compaction, a
temporary sand seal coat surface shall be applied to the cut areas.
This temporary surfacing shall provide a smooth traffic surface
with the existing roadway and shall be maintained until final
restoration. Said surfacing shall remain for 10 days in order to
assure the stability of the backfill under normal traffic conditions.
Following this period and prior to 15 days after application, the
temporary surfacing shall be removed and final roadway surface
restoration accomplished.
C. In advance of final restoration, the temporary surfacing shall be
removed and the existing pavement mechanically sawed straight
and clean to the stipulated dimensions. Following the above
operation, the Contractor shall proceed immediately with final
pavement restoration in accordance with these requirements.
2. Sidewalk, Drive and Curb Removal: Concrete sidewalks, curbs,
combination curb and gutter, walks, drive ribbons, or driveways shall be
removed by initially sawing the structure, with a suitable power saw, as
specified above for pavement. When a formed joint in the concrete is
within 3-feet of the proposed saw cut and parallels the proposed saw cut,
the removal line shall be extended to the formed joint. After sawing, the
material shall be removed.
Cardno TBE Pavement Removal and Replacement
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02574.doc 02574-2
' B. Restorations:
' 1. General: Cut and removed driveway or roadway pavement in connection
with trench excavation shall be replaced or restored in equal or better
condition than the original and as may be shown on the Drawings. The
Drawings indicate minimum requirements. Backfill shall comply with the
other sections of these Specifications or FDOT Standards, whichever are
more stringent.
2. Pavement Restoration - Asphalt:
a. Lmmerock base course shall be compacted for its full thickness to
' not less than 98 percent of maximum density as determined by
AASHTO Designation T 180. Field density of limerock base in
' place shall be determined by AASHTO Designation T 238.
b. Construction methods and equipment shall generally meet the
' requirements thereof as established in the FDOT Specifications.
C. After the application of the prime coat on the base, the prime coat
' shall be allowed to cure without sanding for a period of 24-hours.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the
primed surface against damage during this interval. If, at the end
of 24-hours, it is not proposed to proceed at once with the
application of the surface course, primed surface shall be given a
light application of clean sand and opened to traffic.
'
d. Joints with existing surface and base shall be sawed cut straight
and neat. If necessary to obtain a straight net joint, the contractor
' shall cut out sufficient existing material and replace it with new
material.
' e. The upper surface of the completed base course shall be compacted
to an elevation to permit the full depth of the surface course to be
constructed without deviating from the grade of the pavement
' surface. The completed surface shall match the line and grade of
the existing surface. When pavement is removed to the edge of the
roadway, the replaced base course shall extend not less than 6-
inches beyond the edge of the surfacing
.
f. After the base course construction in the trench area has been
completed and primed, the surface shall be tack coated and the
thickness of Type S-1 asphaltic concrete shall be constructed in
' accordance with the plans or requirements specified above for
pavement restoration.
Cardno TBE Pavement Removal and Replacement
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02574.doc 02574-3 Febru;
3. Driveway Restoration - Asphalt: Driveway pavement with limerock base '
cut and removed in connection with trench excavation shall be replaced or
restored as specified above for street or roadway pavement, except the ,
new limerock base course shall be equivalent to the existing base course in
thickness, except that in no case shall new driveway base course be less
than 6-inches in thickness. Muck or unsuitable material found under '
existing driveway construction will not be removed and replaced.
4. Concrete, Sidewalk, Walkway, Driveway Ribbon and Curb Restoration: I
a. Concrete sidewalks, walkways, driveways, driveway ribbons and
curbs required to be removed for the installation of facilities under
this Contract shall be restored. Class I concrete shall be used in all
cases.
b. Replaced portions of these items shall conform to the lines, grades
and cross sections of the removed portions. Concrete sidewalks
and walkways shall be of 4-inch minimum thickness; concrete
driveways and driveway ribbons shall be 6-inch minimum
thickness. Replaced concrete curb and/or gutter shall be joined
neatly to the remaining section.
5. Pavement Restoration - Concrete: Rigid pavement shall be replaced in
kind with Class I concrete, using high early strength cement. The
subgrade course for rigid pavement shall be replaced with stabilized
subgrade or cleanfill material and compacted to a thickness to match the
existing base.
a. The Contractor shall saw cut and remove the existing concrete to
the nearest joint as directed in the field by the Owner's
Representative. Provision for expansion joints (minimum V?
preformed joint filler) and saw cut joints shall be a part of the
restoration work for the driveway and roadway.
6. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course Overlay:
a. The work under this section includes asphaltic concrete surface
course overlay paving as and where directed by the Owner or his
authorized representative. Where this paving is directed it shall
take the place of asphaltic concrete pavement restoration as
specified herein above. This surface course overlay shall extend
over the reconstructed base course and the existing pavement to the
limits directed by the Owner or his authorized representative,
which generally shall be full width of the roadway.
CardnoTBE Pavement Removal and Replacement
S:\Engin\E-NGINI~I~RING PROJECTS\UTILIT'Y PROJE•CTS\2010\LIPT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02574.doc 02574-4
' b. After the base course construction in the trench area has been
completed and primed, the surface shall be tack coated and the
thickness of Type S-III asphaltic concrete shall be constructed in
' accordance with the plans or requirements specified above for
pavement restoration.
' 7. Nonsurfaced streets, alleys and driveways shall be restored with 6-inches
of compacted limerock base material placed in the top of the trench.
1 END OF SECTION
1 Cardno TBE Pavement Removal and Replacement
S!\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\02574.doc 02574-5
Febru
SECTION 03300
CONCRETE
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included under this section consists of furnishing all materials, forms,
transportation and equipment, and performing all necessary labor to do all the
plain and reinforced concrete work shown on the Drawings, or incidental to the
proper execution of the work, or as herein specified.
B. Composition: Concrete shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate, coarse
aggregate, and water, so proportioned and mixed as to produce a plastic workable
mixture in accordance with all requirements under this section suitable to the
specific conditions of placement.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. All materials specified shall be certified by the producer or manufacturer that the
furnished material meets the specific requirements of the specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cement:
1. Cement: Cement for all concrete shall be domestic Portland cement that
conforms to the requirements of ASTM Designation C 150, Type I, Type
II or Type III. Type III cement for high early strength concrete shall be
used only for special locations and only with the approval of the Owner.
Type II cement containing the lowest calcium thiosulfate available shall be
used in the construction of sanitary sewer manholes, wet wells, pump
stations and other structures in contact with sewage.
2. Only one brand of cement shall be used in any individual structure unless
approved by the Owner. Cement which has become damaged, partially
set, lumpy or caked shall not be used and the entire contents of the sack or
container which contains such cement will be rejected. No salvaged or
reclaimed cement shall be used.
' Cardno TBE Concrete
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\03300.doc 03300-1
Febru
1
B. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of the Florida
Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge '
Construction", latest edition.
C. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate shall conform to the requirements of the t
Florida Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction", latest edition, except that slag shall not be used and the '
gradation shall be grade 57.
D. Water: Water shall be taken from a potable water supply and shall be fresh, clean I
and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali or organic matter.
E. Admixtures: No admixtures shall be used except by specific approval. When '
approved, admixtures shall meet the following minimum standards.
1. Air entraining agent: ASTM C 260. ,
2. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D and free
of chlorides.
F. Membrane Curing Compound: Membrane curing compound shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO Designation M 148, Type 1-clear, or Type 2-white '
pigmented.
G. Expansion Joint Filler:
1. Preformed expansion joint filler shall be of the nonextruding and resilient
bituminous type and conform to the requirements of AASHTO 1
Designation M 213.
2. Expansion joint filler shall be gray neoprene sponge rubber that conforms ,
to AASHTO Designation M 153, Type 1.
H. Membrane: Membrane shall be a 6 mil polyethylene film. '
1. Reinforcing Steel:
1. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation '
A 615, Deformed Grade 60, except where otherwise indicated.
a. The name of the manufacturer of the reinforcing steel shall be '
called out in the shop drawings together with a sketch showing the
pattern of the deformation, including the mill mark. '
Cardno TBE Concrete 1
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\03300.doc 03300-2 Februan
I
1
b. Bar reinforcement shall be accurately fabricated in accordance
with the latest CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. The Contractor
shall have prepared and shall submit to the Owner in sextuplicate,
necessary shop drawings and bar lists. The Contractor shall be
responsible for errors made in shop drawings reviewed by the
Owner or his authorized representative.
2. Welded wire fabric for concrete reinforcement shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM Designation A 185 and shall be formed with
smooth cold-drawn wire.
3. Cold-drawn wire for spirals shall be plain and shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM Designation A 82 with a minimum yield strength
of 70,000 psi.
4. Bar Supports:
a. Bar supports for reinforcing steel shall conform to the
requirements of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, Chapter 3 and
shall be of a height to furnish the concrete cover called for on
Drawings. High chairs shall be furnished for bent or top bars in
solid slabs. Bar supports to be in contact with exterior surfaces of
concrete shall be Class C with plastic caps at least 1-inch in length
on the leg tips, or Class E with stainless steel legs. Bar supports
shall be spaced not more than 100 times the diameter of the bars to
be supported, with not more than 1/4 spacing from the end of the
supported bars to the first chair.
b. Bar supports for slabs on grade shall be plain concrete blocks,
three inches high by 4-inches square with tie wires embedded in
support. Concrete strength shall be at 3,000 psi at time of use.
J. Forms: Forms shall be of wood, steel or other approved materials. The sheeting
for all exposed surfaces shall be 5-ply plywood, unless otherwise specifically
authorized. Forms of like character shall be used for similarly exposed surfaces in
order to produce a uniform appearance. Forming for exposed exterior concrete
from one foot below finished exterior grade to top of structure shall be carefully
fabricated so as to provide a smooth finish without defects. The type, size, shape,
quality and strength of all materials of which the forms are made shall be subject
to the approval of the Owner. If it is his opinion that the interior surfaces of the
forms are too irregular to produce the specified finish, they shall be lined with
smooth, dense, moisture resistant hardboard or other material of which he
approves.
Cardno TBE Concrete
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\03300.doc 03300-3 Februs
1
K. Nonshrink Grout: Nonshrink grout shall be nonmetallic, pre-mixed type and shall
be Sauereisen F-100 Level Fill, Master Builders Masterflow 713, Burke Non-
Ferrous, Non-Shrink Grout or approved equal.
L. Sealer: Sealer shall be applied over existing cleaned surface and proposed
concrete surface. The preventative silane shall be a clear solution of an Alkyl
Silane formulated at 20 percent and 40 percent active Silane in DOT non-
flammable, mineral spirit solvent. Product shall be system 8244 made Polymer
Systems, Inc. or equivalent.
2.02 CLASSIFICATION AND STRENGTH OF CONCRETE
A. Class and minimum strength requirements for concrete shall be as tabulated I
below.
B. Strength Requirements: Concrete shall meet the following minimum 28-day
compressive strength.
Miscellaneous Concrete 2,500 psi
(thrust blocks, pipe encasement, etc.)
Concrete Curb/Gutter/ 3,000 psi
Sidewalk/Pavement
Cast-in-Place/Precast Structures 4,000 psi
Prestressed Structures 5,000 psi
2.03 PROPERTIES AND DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIX
A. Tests and Design Mix:
1. The Contractor, 30 days before the beginning of concrete work, shall
advise the Owner or his authorized representative of the proposed sources
of the materials, or ready-mixed concrete, which the Contractor intends to
use in the work. A design mix which has been used by the concrete
supplier before, may be submitted for approval provided the proportions
and strengths meet the requirements of this specifications.
2. The source and manufacturer of material after once having been approved
shall not be changed by the Contractor, except as approved by the Owner
or his authorized representative, and additional laboratory tests may be
required by the Owner or his authorized representative to prove
conformance with specification requirements.
Cardno TBE Concrete
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\03300.doc 03300-4
' 3. If during the ro ess of the work, tests indicate that concrete is not being
produced in accordance with these Specifications, the Owner or his
' authorized representative may order changes in the materials or their
proportions so as to secure concrete as specified.
' B. Slump: Slumps shall be as low as possible consistent with proper placing. Low
slump concrete shall be used for footing and slabs on grade. Medium slump
concrete shall be used for walls, columns and suspended slabs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
' 3.01 PREPARATION
' A. Concrete Mixing:
1. Equipment: The concrete shall be ready-mixed and the equipment shall
' conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM Designation C 94.
2. Measurement: Equipment necessary to positively determine and control
' the actual amounts of all materials entering the concrete shall be provided
by the Contractor or the concrete manufacturer. All materials shall be
measured by weight, except that water may be measured by volume. A
bag of cement weighs 94 pounds.
3.01 INSTALLATION
1 A. Forms:
' 1. Construction:
a. Forms shall be built true to line and grade, and shall be mortartight
and sufficiently rigid to prevent displacement or sagging between
supports. Particular attention shall be given to adequacy of
supports and shoring, which is the Contractor's responsibility. The
' surfaces of forms used for permanently exposed surfaces shall be
smooth and free from irregularities, dents, sags, or holes. Forms
for surfaces to receive stucco finish shall be suitable for its
' application. Bolts and rods used for internal ties shall be so
arranged that, when the forms are removed, all metal is at least 1 '/2
inch from any concrete surface. Form ties shall be removed
' immediately after removal of forms, and holes shall be thoroughly
plugged with grout within 24 hours after form removal and kept
damp for 4 days to prevent shrinking.
b. Wire ties will not be permitted. All forms shall be so constructed
' Cardno TBE Concrete
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\03300.doc 03300-5
1
Fcbru
that they can be removed without hammering or prying against the
concrete. Unless otherwise indicated, suitable moldings shall be
placed to bevel or round exposed edges at expansion joints or at
any other corners that are to remain. Beams below grade shall
have forms at both sides.
2. Coating: Prior to the placing of steel reinforcement or concrete, forms for
exposed surfaces shall be coated with a nonstaining paraffin base oil or
mineral oil. Forms for unexposed surfaces may be thoroughly wetted in
lieu of oiling, immediately before the placing of concrete.
3. Removal: Forms and/or form supports shall not be removed from any
concrete until it has obtained sufficient strength to support itself and any
live loads it may be subjected to, and then only with the approval of the
Owner or his authorized representative.
B. Reinforcing Steel: When placed in the forms, reinforcement shall be clean and
free of all rust, scale, dust, dirt, paint, oil or other foreign material and shall be
accurately and securely positioned in the forms as shown on the Drawings before
the placing of concrete. Reinforcing steel shall be wired or otherwise fastened
together at intersections and shall be supported by concrete or metal supports,
spacers or hangers. Bar supports, where adjacent to the ground, shall be set on
precast concrete pads compressed into the subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain
approval before fastening reinforcing steel at intersections by welding methods.
1. Splicing of reinforcement shall be held to a minimum and shall be placed
at points of minimum stress. Bars shall be lapped at splices a minimum of
24 bar diameters unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed, and
shall be rigidly wired or clamped.
2. Wire fabric shall be straightened before placing and shall overlap one full
space of mesh at ends and edges and shall be securely fastened. Fabric
shall be supported so as to occupy its proper location in the concrete as
shown on the Drawings. Fabric shall not cross any expansion joints.
C. Embedded Items: In addition to steel reinforcement, pipes, inserts and other
metal objects as shown, specified or ordered shall be built into, set in or attached
to the concrete. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent these objects
from being displaced, broken or deformed. Before concrete is placed, care shall
be taken to determine that all embedded parts are firmly and securely fastened in
place as indicated. They shall be thoroughly clean and free from paint or other
coating, rust, scale, oil, or any foreign matter. No wood shall be embedded in
concrete. The concrete shall be packed tightly around pipes and other metal work
to prevent leakage and to secure perfect adhesion. Drains shall be adequately
protected from intrusion of concrete.
Cardno TBE Concrete
S:\Engin\ENCINEERINC PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIPT STATION 41 REPAIRS\03300.doc 03300-6
1-1
' D. Concrete:
1. General: Reinforcement shall be secured in position, inspected and
' approved before placing concrete. Runways for transporting concrete
shall not rest on reinforcing steel. Concrete not placed within 90 minutes
from the time mixing is started will be rejected and shall be removed from
the job by the Contractor. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as
practicable in final position. Concrete shall not be allowed to drop freely
' more than six feet. All concrete shall be placed in daylight and (excepting
seal concrete) shall be placed in the dry unless otherwise authorized in
writing.
' 2. Slabs Placed On Subgrade: Slab concrete placed on earth or fill subgrade
shall be separated from direct contact with the subgrade by 6 mil
' polyethylene film or other approved material. Sidewalks and walkways
will not require a separation sheet. Polyethylene film shall be lapped four
inches on sides and 12 inches on ends.
' 3. Compaction: Concrete shall be compacted by internal vibrating
equipment, supplemented by hand rodding and tamping as required.
' Vibrators shall in no case be used to move the concrete laterally inside the
forms. Internal vibrators shall maintain a speed of at least 50000 impulses
per minute when submerged in concrete. (At least one spare vibrator in
working condition shall be maintained at the site during concrete placing
operations.) Duration of vibration shall be limited to time necessary to
produce satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation. Vibrator
1 shall be moved constantly and placed in each specific spot only once.
4. Bonding: Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete that has
' set, the surfaces of the set concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned so as to
expose the coarse aggregate and be free of laitance, coatings, foreign
matter and loose particles. Forms shall be retightened. The cleaned
' surfaces shall be dampened, but not saturated, and then thoroughly
covered with a coat of cement grout of similar proportions to the mortar in
the concrete. The grout shall be as thick as possible on vertical surfaces
and at least 1/4-inch thick on horizontal surfaces. The fresh concrete shall
be placed before the grout has attained its initial set.
' 5. Protection: Rainwater shall not be allowed to increase the ratio of mixing
water nor to damage the surface finish. Concrete shall be protected from
disfigurement, damage, vibration, internal fractures and construction
' overloads.
' Cardno TBE Concrete
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\03300.doc 03300-7
Febru
E. Curing:
1. All concrete, including gunite, shall be water cured by covering with a
double thickness of clean burlap, cotton mats, or other approved material
kept thoroughly saturated with water. The forms shall be kept wet until
removed and upon removal, the curing specified herein shall be started
immediately. Concrete shall be cured for a period of 7 days for normal
Portland cement or 4 days for high early strength cement. Concrete
poured in the dry shall not be submerged until it has attained sufficient
strength to adequately sustain the stress involved nor shall it be subjected
to flowing water across its surface until it has cured 4 days. Curing of
gunite shall be started as soon as possible without damaging surface and
not later than 2 hours after placing.
2. In lieu of wet burlap or cotton mats as specified above, concrete slabs may
be covered with wet sand and kept moist for the specified curing period.
The initial curing period of not less than 24 hours shall consist of the wet
burlap or cotton mat method, then the wet sand method may be utilized
until the end of the curing period.
3. Concrete surfaces which will not be coated, painted, plastered, stuccoed,
covered with tile or floor covering or requiring a bonding surface may be
cured by means of a membrane curing compound in lieu of the wet cure
method. The curing compound shall be applied immediately after a
satisfactory surface finish has been completed or forms have been
removed. The rate of application of membrane curing compound shall be
at least one gallon to every 200 square feet of exposed surface to be cured.
The membrane curing compound and impervious covering shall be
continuous and without defects and shall retain the required moisture in
the concrete. Membrane curing compound that becomes damaged by rain,
foot traffic or other conditions within S days of application shall be
reapplied.
F. Finishes:
1. As soon as forms can safely be removed, all irregular projections shall be
chipped off flush with the concrete surfaces. All voids produced by
spacers or any honeycombing shall be pointed up with grout and troweled
flush with the concrete surface immediately after removal of forms and
water cured to prevent shrinkage. Honeycombing shall be cut out to
expose a sound concrete surface prior to pointing. The use of mortar
pointing or patching shall be confined to the repair of small defects in
relatively green concrete. Where substantial repairs are required, the
defective concrete shall be cut out to sound concrete and repaired with
gunite or the concrete shall be removed and reconstructed as directed.
Cardno TSE Concrete
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\03300.doc 03300-5
n
2. Floor slabs shall be brought to a true and even finish by power or hand
floating in a manner that will not bring excess fines to the surface. The
consistency of the concrete shall be such that water does not accumulate at
the surface. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the surface shall be
floated with a wood float and shall be steel troweled to a smooth finish.
Troweling shall be the minimum to obtain a smooth, dense surface and
shall not be done until the mortar has hardened sufficiently to prevent
excess fine material from being worked to the surface. If so directed, the
surface shall be brushed lightly with a push broom so as to produce a
nonslip surface.
3. Concrete surfaces that are not exposed in the completed work will require
no special finish other than such pointing up and rubbing as is necessary to
leave them smooth and impervious.
4. Other surfaces which will be exposed in the completed work shall be
finished by being rubbed smooth with a float and water or a carborundum
brick. The final surface shall be smooth and dense, without pits,
irregularities, blow holes or bubbles.
' G. Grout:
1. Grout for pointing and patching shall consist of cement and fine aggregate
' mixed in the proportions used in the concrete and a minimum amount of
water to produce a workable grout.
' 2. Material for grouting column base plates, anchor bolts, reinforcing bars,
pipe sleeves and pump base plates shall be of the nonshrink type and shall
be mixed and placed as recommended by the manufacturer. Machinery set
' on grout pads shall not be operated until the grout has cured for at least 24
hours.
1 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: The quality of the concrete as to conformance to the specifications is the
' entire responsibility of the Contractor until it is accepted in place in the structure
and verified by the final cylinder tests made by the laboratory. Arrangements for
field testing shall be made by the Contractor with the laboratory as selected by the
1 Owner.
B. Compressive Tests: Standard laboratory compressive test cylinders will be
' obtained by the laboratory when concrete is discharged from the mixer at the site
of the work. A set of 6 cylinders will be obtained for each 60 cubic yards or
fraction thereof placed each day, for each type of concrete. The cylinders will be
' cured under laboratory conditions and will be tested in two groups of three at 7
and 28 days of age, respectively.
Cardno TBE Concrete
S:\Engin\ENGINBERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\03300.doc 03300-9
Febru
C. Slump Tests: The laboratory of the Owner or their representative will make
slump tests of concrete as it is discharged from the mixer at the site of the work.
Slump tests will be made for each 25 cubic yards or "pour" of concrete placed.
Slump tests may be made on any batch and failure to meet specified slump
requirements will be sufficient cause for rejection of that batch.
D. Reports: Proper reports of all tests performed by the laboratory and submitted
promptly to the Owner. Such reports shall be properly labeled so as to identify
the portions of the project into which the materials have been placed.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TBE Concrete
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20 I O\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\03300.doc 03300-10
' SECTION 03600
GROUT
1
PART 1- GENERAL
' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' A. The work included in this Section consists of providing all labor, equipment,
materials, and incidentals. necessary to grout the various items listed hereinafter
and indicated on the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
' A. Manufacturer's literature shall be submitted for review on the following items:
1. Nonshrink grout data shall include grout properties,
' mixing, surface preparation and installations.
1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Grouting materials shall be delivered and stored in unbroken containers with seals
and labels intact as packaged by the manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
' A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Group: Sauereisen F-100 Level Fill, Master Builders
Masterflow 713, Burke Non-Ferrous, Non-Shrink Grout or approved equal pre-
mixed type.
' B. Nonshrink Metallic Group: Master Builders Embeco 636 Grout Premixed type,
' PART 3 - EXECUTION
1 3.01 PREPARATION
A. All bonding surfaces shall be clean and dust and oil free.
1 Cardno TBE Grout
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\03600.doc 03600-1 Febru
1
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Nonshrink Grout:
1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout shall be used for grouting precast concrete
wall panel connections, column base plates, anchor bolts, reinforcing bars,
pipe sleeves, machinery supports and pump base plates.
2. Nonshrink grout shall be mixed and placed as recommended by the
manufacturer.
3. Grout shall be mixed as close to the work area as possible and transported
quickly to its final position in a manner which will not permit segregation
of materials.
4. Nonshrink grout shall be cured with water saturated burlap for at least
three days.
5. Machinery set on grout pads shall not be operated until the grout has cured
for at least 24 hours.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TSE Grout
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\03600.aoc 03600-2
1
SECTION 09910
EXISTING WET WELL REHABILITATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included in this Section consists of furnishing all necessary labor,
equipment and materials, and performing all operations necessary for installing a
watertight and corrosion-resistant liner system in the existing wet well. The wet
well, including top slab shall be lined with an epoxy coating system. The coating
system shall be Raven 405, as manufactured by Raven Lining Systcros, Inc.,
Broken Arrow, Oklahoma (800/324-2810); Green Monster, as manufactured by
GML Coatings, Sarasota, Florida (941/377-8555); or SpectraShield, as
manufactured by CCI Spectrum, Inc., Jacksonville, Florida (904/268-4951).
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. The following items shall be submitted:
1. Technical data sheet on each product used, including ASTM test results
indicating the product conforms to, is suitable for and has been used
before in its intended use per these specifications.
2.
3.
4.
5
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each product used.
Project specific guidelines and recommendations.
Qualification of Applicator:
a. Manufacturer certification that Applicator has been trained and
approved in the handling, mixing and application of the products to
be used.
b. Three (3) references where Applicator has applied epoxy coatings
in underground concrete or masonry structures.
C. Certification by the epoxy lining system manufacturer that the
equipment to be used for applying the products has been approved
and Applicator personnel have been trained and certified for proper
use of the equipment.
d. Proof of any necessary federal, state or local permits or licenses
necessary for the project.
Design details for any additional ancillary systems and equipment to be
used in site and surface preparation, application and testing.
Cardno TBE Existing Wet Well Rehabilitation
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSWULITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\099 I O.doc 09910-1
Febm
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,
A. A protective coating manufacturer's representative shall provide at least two days '
of on-site observation and site specific recommendations relative to surface
preparation, handling, application and curing of its products. In addition, the
manufacturer shall provide written certification that Applicator has been trained
and certified by the manufacturer to handle and apply their products.
B. Applicator shall initiate and enforce quality control procedures consistent with
applicable ASTM, NACE and SSPC standards and the epoxy lining system
manufacturer's recommendations.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Materials are to be kept dry and protected from weather and stored under cover. I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS
A. Standard Portland cement or new concrete (not quick setting high strength
cement) must be well cured prior to application of the epoxy lining system.
Generally, 28 days is adequate cure time for standard Portland. If earlier
application is desired, compressive and/or tensile strength of the concrete can be
tested to determine if acceptable cure has occurred.
B. Cementitious patching and repair materials should not be used unless their
manufacturer provides information as to its suitability for topcoating with an
epoxy coating. Project specific submittals should be provided including
application, cure time and surface preparation procedures that permit optimum
bond strength with the epoxy lining system.
C. Remove existing coatings prior to application of the new epoxy lining system.
Applicator is to maintain strict adherence to applicable NACE and SSPC
recommendations with regard to proper surface preparation and compatibility
with existing coatings.
2.02 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair materials shall be used to fill voids, structurally reinforce and/or rebuild
surfaces, etc., as determined necessary by the engineer and protective coating
applicator. Repair materials must be compatible with the specified epoxy coating
and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Cardno TBE Existing Wet Well Rehabilitation
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\09910.doc 09910-2
2.03 PROTECTIVE COATING APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment shall be specifically designed, or approved for use by the protective
' coating manufacturer.
' PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ACCEPTABLE APPLICATORS
' A. Lining system must be applied according to manufacturer specifications by a
Certified Applicator of the epoxy lining system manufacturer.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. All structures to be lined shall be readily accessible to the Applicator.
B. Appropriate actions shall be taken to comply with local, state and federal
' regulatory and other applicable agencies with regard to environment, health and
safety.
' C. Any active flows shall be dammed, plugged or diverted as required to ensure that
the liquid flow is maintained below the surfaces to be coated. All extraneous
' flows at or above the area lined shall be plugged and/or diverted until the epoxy
has set hard to the touch.
' D. Pipe joints shall be sealed and no leaks may be present prior to commencing.
E. Installation of the lining system shall not commence until the concrete substrate
' has properly cured in accordance with these specifications.
3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Applicator shall inspect all surfaces specified to receive the epoxy lining system
prior to surface preparation. Applicator shall notify Owner of any noticeable
' disparity in the surfaces that may interfere with the proper preparation or
application of the epoxy lining system.
'
B. All concrete or mortar that is not sound or has been damaged by chemical
exposure shall be removed to a sound concrete surface.
C. All contaminants including: oils, grease, incompatible existing coatings, waxes,
form release, curing compounds, efflorescence, sealers, salts, or other
contaminants shall be removed.
Cardno TBE Existiag Wet Well Rehabilitation
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSMILITY PROJECTS\20 I O\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\09910.doc 09910-3
1
Febru
D. Surface preparation method(s) should be based upon the conditions of the
substrate, service environment and the requirements of the epoxy lining system to
be applied.
E. Surfaces to receive epoxy lining system shall be cleaned and abraded to produce a
sound surface with adequate profile and porosity to provide a strong bond
between the lining system and the substrate. Method(s) used shall be performed
in a manner that provides a uniform, sound clean neutralized surface that is not
excessively damaged.
F. Infiltration shall be stopped by using a material that is compatible and suitable for
topcoating with the specified epoxy lining system.
3.04 APPLICATION OF REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair materials shall meet manufacturer recommendations.
B. The repair materials shall be permitted to cure according to manufacturer
recommendations. Curing compounds should not be used unless approved by the
epoxy lining system manufacturer for compatibility.
3.05 APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Application procedures shall conform to the recommendations of the epoxy lining
system manufacturer, including material handling, mixing, and environmental
controls during application, safety, and spray equipment.
B. The spray equipment shall conform to Section 2.03 above.
3.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Testing procedures shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
B. A final visual inspection shall be made by Applicator and Inspector. Any
deficiencies in the finished coating shall be marked and repaired by Applicator
according to the procedures set forth herein.
END OF SECTION ,
Cardno TBE _ Existing Wet Well Rehabilitation
S:\I?ngin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSWTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\09910.avc 09910-4 Frbruar,
SECTION 11305
SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS, CONTROLS AND PANELS
1
' GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' A. The contractor shall furnish and install, as described hereinafter and shown on the
plans, two constant speed, centrifugal sewage pumps to operate in the wet well of
' Pump Station 41. The pumps shall be as manufactured by Flygt Corporation and
be capable of operating in a submerged environment and shall be explosion proof.
Additionally, the Contractor shall furnish and install pump discharge piping,
valves and valve vault, a station control panel and all miscellaneous and
associated equipment required for a complete operating sewage pumping system.
' B. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to setup, maintain
and operate a temporary sewage bypass system as necessary during the proposed
construction. The Contractor will be responsible and liable for all conditions and
' requirements for the temporary bypass specifications set forth in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall perform such start-up operations and tests as delineated.
B. Pumps shall be tested to Hydraulic Institute (HI) Standards; International
Standards Organization (ISO) Standards are not acceptable. Certification must
' accompany pumps.
C. Each pump shall have a stainless steel nameplate indicating the design capacity in
' GPM with the one pump operating, the TDH with one pump operating, RPM,
Voltage, Full-Load Amperage, Date of Manufacture and Explosion-Proof Listing
Organization. The nameplate shall read GPM at TDH.
'
D. All equipment shall be installed by skilled workmen in accordance with the
instructions of the equipment supplier.
'
E. All equipment supplied shall have ample means of lubrication for all bearings and
other metal surfaces in sliding contact. The Contractor shall provide all
lubricants, fuel and power necessary to start-up, test, and place the pumping
facility in operation.
Cardno T BE Submersible Sewage Pump
,_$, Controls and Panels
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRSA 1305.doc 11305-1
f
Februi
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: The contractor shall submit six sets of detailed and dimensioned
working shop drawings showing the construction of the proposed facility and
installation of all equipment complete in every respect. Each drawing shall be
indexed and/or referenced to the Contract Drawings and Specifications. No work
upon the manufacture or fabrication of any equipment shall be performed until the
Engineer's review has been obtained. Certified pump curves shall be submitted
with the shop drawings and shall indicate actual test performance of units
furnished. The Contractor shall also submit layout drawings showing exact
installation, piping and foundation details for the pumping units being installed.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: The pump manufacturer shall warrant the pumps being supplied to the
Owner against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of five years
under normal use, operation and service. In addition, the manufacturer shall
replace certain parts which shall become defective through normal use and wear
on a progressive schedule of cost for a period of five years: parts included are the
mechanical seal, impeller, pump housing, wear ring and ball bearings. The
warranty shall be in published form, apply to all similar units and be submitted
with the shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. The complete guide rail slide bracket assembly shall be non-sparking.
B. Pipe and fittings shall be ductile iron.
2.02 PUMPS
A. Pumps to be filrnished and installed shall be non-clog, heavy duty municipal-type
submersible pumps. Pumps shall be FM (Factory Mutual Research) rated for
Class I, Division I, Group C and D environments. Each pump shall be capable of
passing a three-inch diameter sphere and any trash or stringy material which can
pass through a four-inch sewage collection system. The pump/motor unit must be
non-overloading across the complete head capacity range of the pump. Pumps
shall meet the following listed minimum operating conditions.
NO.O>E' PUMPS
STATION INSTALLED EACH PUMP
GPM
TDH
RPM
PS-41 2 250 70 1760
Cardno TBE Submersible Sewage Pumps, Controls and Panels
S:\Engin\ENGINEERINC3 PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20 I O\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\I 1305.doc 11305-2
B. Pump shall be of the volute-type and centerline discharge design to minimize
clogging or flow interference. They shall be of one-piece construction, made from
cast iron, Class 30, in accordance with ASTM Specifications A-48, latest revision.
The design shall be for a wet pit installation, permanently connected to outlet
pipes. The pump shall be capable of operating in a continuous submerged
condition.
C. Impellers shall be of the non-clog type, one piece construction and mounted
directly on a stainless steel pump motor shaft.
D. For information purposes, the design of these facilities and dimensional layouts
are based on the following pump model:
STATION. MANUFACTURER PUMP MODEL IMPELLER NOMINAL HP.
PS41 Flygt NP-3153.181 HTJ 466 12
2.03 MOTORS
A. Pumps and motors shall be constructed as integral units and shall be the products
of one manufacturer/supplier. Each motor shall be UL listed, sealed, submersible-
type explosion proof electric motors for operation on 480 Volt, 3-Phase, four-
wire, 60 Hertz, AC power.
B. The motor nameplate rating shall not be exceeded by the brake horsepower
requirement of the pump for the design condition of service specified and for the
impeller-diameter furnished. The motor shaft shall be stainless steel, impervious
to the liquid and waste matter being pumped. Shaft supports shall be a single-
row, heavy-duty ball bearings for the upper support and a double-row, heavy-duty
ball bearings for the lower support.
C. Motors shall be air-filled. Oil-filled motors shall not be considered equal.
D. Motors shall have tandem mechanical seals, and the lower seal shall be silicone
carbide. Mechanical seals shall not require pumped liquid as a lubricant. Motors
shall be capable of continuous operation in a submerged, partially-submerged or
non-submerged condition.
E. Motors shall have a seal probe in the motor housing to detect the presence of
moisture. Motors shall also have a bimetallic electromechanical temperature
monitor embedded in each phase to de-activate the pump. The temperature
monitors shall be self-resetting. A fault condition shall shut down pump and
annunciate at the control panel.
F. Motor cables shall be in accordance with NEC specifications. Cables provided
Cardno TBE Submersible Sewage Pumps, Controls and Panels
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\11305.doc 11305-3 Febru
shall be a minimum of 60 feet in length. Cables shall run from the pump to the '
junction box without splicing. Motor bearings shall be pre-lubricated at the
factory and have an electric motor specification B-10, life of 50,000 hours.
2.04 STATION CONTROL PANEL '
A. The Pump Control Panel, rack mounted, shall be a dead front style enclosure as ,
shown on the plans and/or defined in the Technical Specifications. The panel
shall be supplied by the pump supplier to insure compatibility between pumps and
all controls. The cabinet shall have fully-gasketed hinged door with ground strap. '
The door shall be operated by a single lockable lever type handle that actuates a
three-point interior latching mechanism with a one-quarter turn.
B. An inner aluminum door mounted on a continuous piano-type hinge shall be
furnished for protection against exposed wiring and shall have cut-outs for access
to the circuit breakers. '
C. All wiring within the panel shall be as specified in the Technical Specifications,
or as noted on the plans. All panel components shall be UL listed and conform to 1
all applicable codes and regulations as specified in the Technical Specifications,
or as noted on the plans. t
D. Outer and inner doors shall have provisions to be held in the "open" position. A
permanent metal pocket shall be provided on the left exterior side of the enclosure '
door for 8%2-inch by 11-inch papers. The panel shall have a wiring schematic
permanently affixed to the interior of the enclosure door and it will show the
numbering and color coding of the wires in the control panel. '
E. A sign shall be installed on the outside of the control panel indicating the station
number and a City contact phone number. '
2.05 CONTROL SYSTEM
'
A. The control system shall provide for the automatic and manual control of the
pumps to maintain a pumped down condition of the wet well.
'
B. The control system shall control two submersible sewage pumps at the station
based upon a transducer water level sensing system.
'
C. The controller shall provide adjustable on/off level settings for each pump. The
pumps shall operate in a lead and lag mode, based on corresponding rising and
falling wetwell water levels, as selected by the operator. The controller shall
'
recognize and alarm a failed pump, and automatically select the other pump as the
operating pump.
Cardno TBE Submersible Sewa a Pum s Controls and Panels 1
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20I0\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\11305.doc 11305-4 February
' L As the level in the wet well rises, the lead pump, as determined by the
alternator, shall start and pump the station to the "off' position. In the
' event the incoming flow exceeds the capacity of the lead pump, the
number one lag pump shall start and both pumps shall run to the off level.
The alternator shall switch when the off level is reached. Alternation
' control is provided through the RTU control functions. The controller
shall also contain suitable high-level and low-level alarms.
' D. If the level continues to rise, alarm functions shall be activated. A dual float
controller backup system shall be provided for the lift station. If primary
controller fails to maintain control, as the level rises the high-level float switch
shall call for two pumps to start eight seconds apart and activate the station alarm
relay. The pumps shall continue to operate until the lower float switch is
activated on the falling water level.
' 2.06 ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT
I A. The control system shall include, but not be limited to, the equipment listed
below.
' 1. A three position Hand/Off/Auto switch shall be provided for each pump.
The switch shall be NEMA 4x rated with ten amp contacts. A position
indicating legend plate shall be provided. The Hand/Off/Auto switches
' shall be mounted on the inner dead front door.
2. A green "Run" pilot indicator for each pump shall be mounted on the dead
front door.
3. An elapsed time meter for each pump shall be mounted on the dead front
' door. The meter shall operate on 120 VAC, shall be indicated in hours
(six digits) and tenths and shall be non-resetable.
' 4. Pilot lights and running time meters.
5. Main disconnect switches and main circuit breakers.
6. High level alarms including externally mounted alarm light and horn.
' 7. Auxiliary power receptacle.
8. Lightning arrestor and surge protection.
1
' Cardno TBE Submersible Sewa a Pumps, Controls and Panels
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20 I O\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\11305.doc 11305-5
1
Febm
2.07 MISCELLANEOUS
A. A final Record Drawing, laminated in mylar, shall be attached to the inside of the I
front door. A list of all legends shall be included.
B. All component parts in the control panel shall be permanently marked and
identified as they are indicated on the drawing. Marking shall be on the back
plate adjacent to the component. All control conductors shall be identified with
wire markers at each end as close as practical to the end of conductor.
C. All panels shall be tested to the power requirements as shown on the plans to
assure proper operation of all the components. Each control function shall be
activated to check for proper indication.
D. All equipment shall be guaranteed for a period of three years from date of
shipment. The guarantee is effective against all defects in workmanship and/or
defective component. The warranty is limited to replacement or repair of the
defective equipment.
E. The manufacturer shall be a UL listed shop for industrial control systems and
shall provide evidence of such on request from the engineer or using authority. '
2.05 ACCESS HATCHES AND GUIDE RAILS
A. Stainless steel dual type upper guide rail holders shall be provided and mounted
below the casting frame as indicated on the drawings. The lower guide holders
shall be integral with the discharge base elbow. The guide rails shall be
continuous Schedule 40 welded type 304 stainless steel pipes of the size
recommended by the pump manufacturer. A 304 stainless steel power cable and
control cable holder shall be provided for each pump and installed as indicated on
the drawings. The rails shall be cushioned with rubber- grommets to eliminate
vibration noise. All material used to fabricate upper guide holders, cable holders,
etc., shall be aluminum or 304 stainless steel. All bolts, anchors, hinge pins and
other fasteners shall be 304 stainless steel.
B. Wet Well and Valve Vault Access Hatches: Shall be 300 lb/SF load rated. Frames
and covers complete with hinges, locking devices and/or hand lifts shall be
aluminum and/or stainless steel construction. The frame shall have safety locking
rails for locking in the open position. The covers shall be checker plate design.
All access vaults shall be equipped with a hinged hatch safety grate as
manufactured by U.S. F. Fabrication, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Cardno TBE Submersible Sewage Pumps. Controls and Panels
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20 I O\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\11305.doc 11305-6
1 3.01 INSTALLATION
' A. All material and equipment shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and as
recommended by the manufacturer.
' B. Additional items of construction, such as valve boxes, flanged adapters, thrust blocks
and other items necessary for the complete installation of the system shall be included
and shall be constructed of first-class materials.
1
3.02 BYPASS PUMPING
' A. The Contractor will be responsible and liable for all conditions and requirements for
the temporary bypass system as specified in this section. The Contractor shall include
' payment for all bypass pumping operations specified herein in the appropriate and
applicable lump sum contract bid item for the station.
' B. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, power, and equipment to setup,
maintain, operate, and remove a sewage bypass system as necessary during the
proposed construction for the diversion of existing wastewater flow around the work
' area. The Contractor shall be responsible for any wastewater spills during the bypass
operation and pay for any and all fines, fees, property damage, environmental damage
and cleanup costs that are associated with wastewater spills.
1 C. The design, installation, operation and removal of the temporary pumping system
shall be the Contractor's responsibility. The bypass system shall meet the
requirements of all codes and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.
1. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed description of the temporary bypass
' system according to the requirements set forth in this section. The Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer detailed plans and descriptions outlining all
provisions and precautions to be taken by the Contractor, regarding the handling
' of existing wastewater flows. No construction shall begin until all submittals are
reviewed and approved by the Engineer. The temporary bypass plans must
include the following:
' a. Quantity and location of the pumps (primary and standby).
b. Model, size, flow capabilities and brief description of each pump.
' c. Power requirements for electric driven units, when applicable.
d. Complete set of pump specifications with system demand curve.
' e. A schematic drawing of the temporary bypass system.
f. Method of discharge pertaining to manholes, lift stations or temporary
structures.
' g. Description of discharge manifold including isolation valves and non-
return valves.
h. Method of noise control for each pump.
Cardno TBE Submersible Sewase PumDS. Controls and Panels
1 8:1Engin\ENGINEERING PROIECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS120IOILIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS1I 1305.doe 11305-1 Febru
2. Pumps: All pumps used shall be fully automatic, self-priming and shall not
require the use of footvalves. Vacuum assisted or compressor assisted dry priming
pumps are acceptable. The pumps may be electric or diesel powered. All pumps
used must be constructed to allow dry running for extended periods of time.
The Contractor shall have adequate standby equipment available and ready for
immediate operation and use in the event of an emergency or breakdown. One
standby pump for each size bypass pump utilized shall be installed at the mainline
flow bypassing locations, and ready for use in the event of primary pump failure.
E. Preparation: The Contractor is responsible for locating any existing utilities in the
area in which the Contractor selects to install the bypass system. The Contractor shall
install his bypass pipelines to minimize any disturbance to existing utilities and shall
obtain prior approval of the pipeline locations from the City and the Engineer. All
costs associated with relocating utilities and obtaining all approvals shall be paid by
the Contractor.
The temporary bypass pumping system shall be placed in service, tested, and operated
for a minimum of 12 hours before any work may begin.
F. Performance: The Contractor shall abide by all OSHA regulations for the duration of
the project. The Contractor is responsible for providing bypass pumps which shall
comply with the local noise ordinance.
The Contractor shall insure that the temporary pumping system is operated and
maintained properly. A responsible operator shall be on hand at all times when pumps
are operating or the system must be monitored via a remote monitoring and alarm
system. If the remote system is used the Contractor must furnish a list of emergency
numbers and contacts that will be programmed into the telemetry system.
During all bypass pumping operations, the Contractor shall protect the pump station
and local sewer lines from damage inflicted by any equipment. The Contractor shall
be responsible for all physical damage to the pump station, and local sewer lines
caused by the Contractor's equipment or employees.
The Contractor shall maintain the bypass pumping system at all times. If any spills of
wastewater occur due to the failure of the Contractor to maintain the temporary
bypass pumping system, the Contractor will be responsible for any fines levied by
FDEP or any other applicable agency.
G. Installation and Removal Requirements: Installation of bypass pipelines is prohibited
in all saltmarsh/wetland areas. The pipeline must be located off streets and shoulders
of the roads. When the bypass pipeline crosses local streets and private driveways, the
contractor must place the bypass pipelines in trenches and cover them with temporary
pavement. Use of driveway crossings must be authorized and approved by the
Cardno TBE Submersible Sewage Pumps. Controls and Panels
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRSA 1305.doc 11305-8
' Engineer.
Upon completion of the project, the entire bypass pumping system must be flushed
and sanitized properly before it is disassembled. Upon written approval, the
Contractor shall remove all components of the temporary pumping system. The
Contractor shall perform all restoration work to the satisfaction of the Owner.
' H. SCADA Requirements: The Contractor shall provide an automated cell phone call
box at all bypass sites so that a breakdown or failure of the bypass will prompt an
' immediate call to the Contractor who will dispatch personnel immediately to the site
to resolve the problem. The Contractor shall keep existing SCADA system in
operation at all times during bypassing so that the City will be informed of the pump
' station operation.
' 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests: A qualified representative of the pumping system supplier shall
' inspect the installation and supervise start-up performed by the Contractor's
personnel. All components of the systems shall be tested for proper operation
' during the start-up operation.
B. Maintenance Procedures: After the equipment has been placed into operation, the
' qualified representative of the pump system supplier shall instruct the Owner's
personnel in proper operating and maintenance procedures without additional cost
to the Owner.
' C. Testing: Upon completion of installation, the Contractor shall test the facilities to
demonstrate that the station performs as specified. He shall perform the initial
' testing to assure himself that acceptance testing can be satisfactorily completed.
The Contractor shall then arrange for the equipment manufacturer to furnish a
qualified representative to check the installation and conduct testing for final
acceptance, and shall give the Engineer written notice as to the date and time of
the test. An acceptance test shall demonstrate that all items are in compliance
' with the function as specified. Testing shall illustrate the following:
1. That all units have been properly installed and are in correct alignment.
2. That all units operate without overheating or overloading any parts and
without objectional vibration.
' 3. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts.
I4. That all pumps can deliver the specified pressure and quantity and have
correct rotation, volts and amps.
Cardno TBE Submersible Sewage Pumps, Controls and Panels
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\11305.doc 11305-9
Febru,
1
5. That the pumps shall be capable of pumping raw, unscreened sewage.
6. That all pumps, sensors and controls perform satisfactorily as to sequence
control, correct start and stop elevations, and proper high and low level
alarm functions.
In addition to furnishing, delivering, installing and testing equipment, the
Contractor shall provide the services of competent manufacturing representatives
for the period indicated. Additional time, beyond that specified which is
necessitated by installation or other non-City related requirements, shall be paid
for by the Contractor. Such representatives shall assist the City's personnel in
start-up, instructing operating personnel of the City in the maintenance and
operation of the equipment, conducting tests, and making recommendations for
producing the most efficient results. These services shall be made during the
initial operation of the pumping station and shall be over and above any services
necessary during construction and to correct defective materials or workmanship
during the guarantee period. These representatives shall be specially trained and
qualified for installation, adjustment, start-up and testing work and shall not be
sales representatives only. The cost for such representation, including subsistence
and travel, shall be included under this Contract. The time required for
instructing the City's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the
station is not to exceed one day.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TBE Submersible Sewage Pumps, Controls and Panels
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIPT STATION 41 REPAIRS\1 1305.doc 11305-10
1
1
SECTION 15050
PIPING, FITTINGS, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included in this Section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment and
materials and in performing all operations necessary for the construction or
installation of all piping, valves, valve boxes and all castings and appurtenances
within, adjacent and connecting to the sewage pump station and inside the limits
of the work shown therefore, complete and ready for operation as shown on the
Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. In general, the following shop or data drawings shall be submitted for approval:
1. Test certificates for pipe (Mill Test Reports)
2. Details for Restrained Joints
3. All Valves and Valve Boxes
4. Weld Inspection Reports
6. Detail Piping Layout Drawings
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. During shipping, delivering and installing pipe and accessories, they shall be
handled in such a manner as to ensure a sound undamaged condition.
B. Particular care shall be taken not to damage the pipe lining and coating.
PART 1 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE
A. General: Pipe for wastewater lines and drain lines, 4-inches in nominal inside
diameter or greater shall be ductile iron pipe, except as otherwise indicated. Pipe
for underground use shall be mechanical or push on joints, and exposed pipe in
structures, i.e., wet well, valve vault, etc., for above ground use shall be flanged,
unless otherwise indicated. Pipe shall be provided with joint types, designs and
materials compatible to the pipe with which it connects.
B. Iron Pipe Lining for Sewage: Ductile iron pipe and fittings for sanitary sewer
force mains shall be epoxy lined. Epoxy lining shall be 40 mil nominal dry film
thickness (multi-pass process) and shall be Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy as
Cardno TBE Piping Fittings, Valves and Accessories
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\15050.doc 15050-1 Febm
1
manufactured by the Protecto Division of Vulcan Painters, Inc., or equal. The '
interior of the ductile iron pipe and fittings shall not have been lined with any
substance prior to the application of the specified lining material and no coating ,
shall have been applied to the first six inches of the exterior of the spigot ends.
The lining shall be applied by a competent firm with a successful history of
applying linings to the interior of ductile iron pipe and fittings. Surface '
preparation, lining of pipe, coating of bell sockets and spigot ends, number of
coats and touch up and repair shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. The pipe or fitting manufacturer shall supply a certificate '
attesting that the applicator met the requirements of this specification; that the
material used was as specified; that the linings have the nominal dry film
thickness specified; and, that the linings have no pinholes when tested with a
nondestructive 2,500 volt test. Lined pipe and fittings shall be handled only from
the outside of the pipe and fittings.
C. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be class 51 or greater. All buried ductile iron ,
pipe and fittings shall be polyethylene encased (minimum 8 mil) in accordance
with ANSI/AWWA A21.5/C105 and ASTM A674. All fittings shall be restrained ,
joints.
D. Plastic Pipe:
1. Unless otherwise specified, all pressure pipe smaller than 4-inches in
nominal inside diameter shall be PVC. PVC pipe that is exposed to '
sunlight shall either be resilient to deterioration due to sunlight or be
coated in some manner so as to protect the pipe.
2. Plastic pipe smaller than 2-inches shall be Schedule 80, PVC pipe, with '
threaded joints and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
Designation D 1785, Class 1120 or 1220. ,
3. Unless otherwise indicated, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe 2-inches in
diameter or larger shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 2241,
Class 1120 or 1220, SDR 26, for a minimum pressure rating of 160 PSI at '
73° F.
4. Plastic pipe furnished under (2) and (3) above shall bear the approved seal
of the National Sanit
ti
nd
ti
F
NSF '
a
on
ou
a
on (
).
5. Unless otherwise indicated, plastic gravity sewer pipe and fittings shall be
unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and conform to the requirements '
of ASTM Designation D 3034, Type PSM, Class 12454-5 or 12454-C,
with elastomeric gasket joints. PVC pipe and fittings shall be as
manufacturer by Johns-Manville, Certainteed or approved equal. '
E. Identification Tape: Electronically traceable identification tape shall be installed
18 inches above installed pipe on a tamped backfill surface, continuously over all ,
mains. The tape shall be a minimum of 3-inches wide, have a minimum tensile
'
Cardno TBE Piping Fittings. Valves and Accessories
S:\Cngin\CNGINEERTNG PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LTPT STATION 41 REPAIRSA 5050.doe 15050-2 Februan
1
' strength of 50 pounds and have the words "force main" printed on it.
2.02 FITTINGS AND VALVES
' A. Pipe Fittings:
' 1. Iron: Cast iron and ductile iron pipe fittings shall have a 250 PSI pressure
rating and shall conform to the requirements of AWWA Standard C 110.
' Joints shall be of the type shown on the drawings and fit the pipe
furnished. Flanges shall be drilled for ANSI Standard B16.1, 125 pound
template. Grooved end point fittings shall conform to the applicable
' requirements of this paragraph. The lining and coating for the fittings
shall be as specified above for ductile iron pipe. Wall fittings or sleeves
shall be cast iron selected with length suitable for the wall in which they
' are placed.
2. Plastic: Fittings for Schedule 80 plastic pipe shall be Schedule 80 and
conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation D 2464 and D 2467
' for threaded or solvent weld joints respectively. Fittings for plastic pipe
with 0-ring joints shall be of the type recommended by the pipe
manufacturer and conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation D
' 2467. All fittings shall bear the approval stamp of the National Sanitation
Foundation.
' 3. Unions: All pipe, tubing and hose connections to hydraulic or air operated
equipment, appurtenances and accessories shall be made with a union type
fitting.
' B. Joint Material:
' 1. Mechanical Joints: Cast iron and ductile iron pipe mechanical joints and
push on joints shall be made up with rubber gaskets conforming to ANSI
Standard A21.11. Glands for mechanical joint pipe shall be bituminous
' coated and bolts and nuts shall be of high strength cast iron, or high
strength low alloy steel as specified in ANSI Standard A21.11.
' 2. Iron Pipe Flanged Joints: Flanged connections shall comply with the
requirements of ANSI Standard B16.1, 125 pound class. Flanges for
ductile iron pipe shall be of ductile iron. Machine bolts shall be the best
' commercial quality steel with hexagonal nuts of the same quality metal.
Gaskets shall be full face (ring face) of neoprene, red rubber or corrugated
copper.
' 3. Grooved End Couplings: Grooved end couplings for ductile iron pipe
shall not be allowed.
4. Solvent Joints: Joints for plastic pipe and fittings shall be made using
material and methods as recommended by the plastic pipe manufacturer.
' Cardno TBE Pinine. Fittinzs_ Valves and Accessories
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTMUTILITY PROJEGTS\2010U.IFT STATION 41 REPAIRSU 1050.doc 15050-3 Febru;
I
5. Couplings: Plain end joint material shall be Dresser couplings, Style 38, '
or approved equal.
6. Restrained Joints: Restrained joints may be of the types fabricated by the '
various manufacturers upon approval of the Engineer of details submitted
by the Contractor. Restrained joints that require field welding or grooves,
or joints using set screws will not be acceptable.
C. Wall Sleeves, Pipes and Castings:
1. Wall Sleeves: Wall sleeves shall be of cast iron, ductile iron or carbon
steel with steel galvanized after fabrication and shall have a waterstop
located in the center of the wall. Sleeves shall be provided with seals and
shall be oversized as required for the installation of seals. Sleeves shall
terminate flush with finished surfaces of walls and ceilings, and shall
extend 2-inches above finished floor. Escutcheons shall be provided at
walls and floor to completely conceal the sleeves smaller than 3-inches.
Escutcheons shall be cast iron, nickel plated split-type.
2. Interior: Wall sleeves shall be installed for all piping passing through
interior walls and floors, except where noted on the drawings. Sleeves
shall be of sufficient size to pass the pipe without binding. Sleeves shall
terminate flush with finished surfaces of walls and ceilings, and shall
extend 2-inches above finished floor. Escutcheons shall be provided at
walls and floor to completely conceal the sleeves smaller than 3-inches.
Escutcheons shall be cast iron, nickel plated split-type.
3. Wall Pipes: All piping passing through exterior walls and base slabs shall
be provided with wall pipes. All pipes shall be of ductile iron and shall
have a waterstop located in the center of the wall. Each wall pipe shall be
of the same grade, thickness and interior coating as the piping to which it
is joined. Those portions of the wall pipes that are buried shall have a
coal-tar outside coating.
4. Wall Sleeve Seals: Wall sleeve seals shall be modular mechanical type
consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously
fill the annular space between the pipe and wall sleeve. Links shall be
loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the
pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt and nut. After the seal assembly
is positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolts shall cause the rubber
sealing elements to expand and provide an absolutely water-tight seal
between the pipe and wall sleeve. The synthetic rubber shall be suitable
for exposure to treated sewage effluent and groundwater. Bolts, nuts and
hardware shall be 18-8 stainless steel. The seals shall be Link Seal as
manufactured by Thunderline Corporation or equal, and the wall sleeve
and seal shall be sized as recommended by the seal manufacturer.
D. Plug Valves:
Cardno TBE Piping, Fittings, Valves and Accessories
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRSU 5050.doe 15050-4
1. All valves shall be eccentric plug valves unless otherwise specified.
Valves shall be as manufactured by DeZurik, Homestead or approved
equal.
2. Plug valves shall be tested in accordance with current AWWA Standards.
' 3. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced
plugs and shall be furnished with end connections as shown on the plans.
Flanged valves shall be faced and drilled to the ANSI 125/150 lb.
standard. Mechanical joint ends shall be to the AWWWA Standard C111-
72. Bell ends shall be to the AWWA Standard C100-55 Class B. Screwed
ends shall be to the NPT standard.
4. Valve bodies shall be of ASTM A126 Class B Semi-steel, 31,000 psi
tensile strength minimum in compliance with AWWA Standard C507-73,
' Section 5.1 and AWWA Standard C504-70 Section 6.4. Port areas for
valves 20-inches and smaller shall be 80 percent of full pipe area. Valves
24-inch and larger shall have a minimum port area of 100 percent of full
nominal pipe area. All exposed nuts, bolts, springs, washers, etc. shall be
' zinc or cadmium plated. Resilient plug facings shall be of Hycar or
Neoprene.
' 5. Valves shall be furnished with permanently lubricated stainless steel or
oil-impregnated bronze upper and lower plug stem bushings. These
bearings shall comply with current AWWA Standards.
E. Gate Valves:
1. Gate valves 3 inches through 12 inches shall be resilient-seated and meet
or exceed all the requirements of AWWA Standard C 509. The resilient
seating arrangement shall provide zero leakage at the design working
' pressure when installed with line flow in either direction. All ferrous
surfaces inside and outside shall have a fusion-bonded epoxy coating. All
valves shall be provided with O-ring seals. The design and machining of
valves shall be such as to permit replacing the O-ring seals in the valves
while in service without leakage.
F. Check Valves:
' 1. Small Check Valves: Small check valves 3-inches or less shall be
constructed of Schedule 80 PVC with union ends. These check valves
shall be used where plans call for "Flapper Check Valves" at the end of
the trap on the drain from the valve vault.
2. Large Check Valves: Swing check valves 4-inches through 30-inches
shall be constructed with heavy cast iron or cast steel body with a bronze
' or stainless steel seat ring, a noncorrosive shaft for attachment of weight
and lever. The valve must be tight seating, its seat ring shall be renewable
Cardno TBE Piping, Fittings, Valves and Accessories
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\15050.doc 15050-5
Febru;
and must be securely held in place by a threaded joint; the valve disc shall
be of cast iron or cast steel and shall be suspended from a noncorrosive
shaft which will pass through a stuffing box. Check valves shall
absolutely prevent the return of water back through the valve when the
inlet pressure decreases below the delivery pressure. Hydrostatic test
pressure for horizontal swing valves shall be 300 PSI. A tapped boss with
plug shall be provided on the check valve bonnet for future use with a
pressure gauge.
G. Backflow Preventer:
1. The 1-inch reduced pressure principal backflow preventer for the potable
water system shall be a complete assembly consisting of two
independently acting spring-loaded toggle lever check valves together
with an automatically operating pressure differential relief valve located
between the two check valves. The first check valve shall reduce the
supply pressure a predetermined amount so that during normal flow and
cessation of normal flow, the pressure between the checks is less than the
supply pressure. In the case of leakage of either check valve, the
differential relief valve should discharge to atmosphere to maintain the
pressure between the checks, less than the supply pressure.
2. This unit shall contain tightly closing shut-off valves located at each end
of the device, and shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.
Operation shall be completely automatic. All internal parts of the toggle
lever check valves and pressure differential relief valve must be removable
or replaceable without removal of the reduced pressure principal backflow
preventer from the line. The total head loss through the complete
backflow assembly shall not exceed 10 PSI at the "rated flow".
3. The ends shall be female threaded for NPT. The main body and trim shall
be bronze, ASTM B-61. The differential valve shall be bronze as above
with stainless steel 304 trim.
H. Pressure Gauges:
1. General: All pressure gauges shall have a 41/2-inch dial, shall read PSI or
feet of water as indicated below and shall be appropriately marked for PSI
and feet of water. All gauges that are to be installed shall be Red Valve
Pressure Gauge, Series 40 or equal.
I. Vacuum Breakers: Antisiphon vacuum breakers to prevent back siphonage of
polluted water into a potable water supply shall be furnished and installed where
shown on the drawings, required codes or directed by the Engineer. Vacuum
breakers shall be equal to the Watts Regulator Company's No. 288A Series, or as
otherwise indicated. Hose Bibb vacuum breakers shall be Watts Regulator
Cardno TBE Piping. Fittings, Valves and Accessories
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRSA 5050.doc 15050-6
' Company's No. 8, Neptune Model 5 or approved equal. The devices shall be
certified and listed under the ASSE Standards.
' J. Supports and Hangers: Pipe supports and hangers shall conform to Federal
Specification WW-H-171, or shall be as specifically shown or indicated on the
drawings. Pipe hangers shall be complete with rods and clamps or inserts
' proportioned to the size of the pipe supported.
K. Valve Boxes: Cast iron valve boxes shall be provided for all valves installed
1 underground which do not have extended operators such as required by the plug
valves. The valve boxes shall be adjustable to fit the depth of earth cover over the
valve and shall be designed so as to prevent the transmission of surface loads
' directly to the valve or piping. Valve boxes shall have an interior diameter of not
less than 5-inches. The valve boxes shall be provided with covers marked with
the appropriate symbols as follows for the systems that they serve: N.P.W. (Non-
Potable Water); Water (Potable Water) and Sewer. The covers shall be
constructed so as to prevent tipping or rattling. Boxes shall be equal to Clow
Corporation No. F 2450, Mueller Company H-10357 or approved equal.
Extension sections shall be cast iron only.
' L. Tie Rods: Steel for tie rods and tie bolts shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM Designation A 242, and rods shall be galvanized in conformance with
requirements ASTM Designation A 123. Tie rods and tie bolts shall be Super
' Star Tierod Figure No. SS12 and Tiebolt Figure No. SST7 respectively as
manufactured by Star National Products
.
' M. Pipe and Valve Identification System:
1. Underground Warning: Underground warning tape for metallic piping
shall be 6-inches wide, brown, .004-inch polyethylene film with a printed
' legend "CAUTION SEWAGE FORCE MAIN BELOW". Warning tape
for PVC mains shall be 2-inches or wider, brown, .004-inch polyethylene
film metallic lined and with a printed legend "CAUTION SEWAGE
t FORCE MAIN BELOW". Tape shall be as manufactured by Seton Name
Plate Corporation, Terra Tape by Griffolyn Co. Inc. or approved equal.
' 2. Valve Tags: Tags shall be as manufactured by Seton Name Plate
Corporation of Floy Tag and manufacturing Co., or approved equal.
' N. Miscellaneous Items:
1. Other items necessary for the complete installation and not specified
' herein shall conform to the details and notes shown on the drawings. All
minor items implied, usually included, or required for the construction of a
complete operating system shall be installed whether shown on the detail
drawings or not.
Cardno TBE Piping Fittings, Valves and Accessories
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\15050.doe 15050-7
Febru,
2. Appropriate signs shall be provided for nonpotable water system outlets '
with a legend of "Non-Potable Water - Do Not Drink".
PART 2 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. All pipe and fittings, valves and other material shall be subject to inspection and
approval by the Engineer after delivery, and no broken, cracked, misshapen,
imperfectly coated, or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used.
When a defect or crack is discovered, the damaged portion shall not be installed.
Cracked pipe shall have the defect cut off at least 12-inches from the break in the
sound section of the barrel.
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Piping:
1. At threaded joints between PVC and metal pipes, the metal shall contain
the socket end and the PVC side the spigot. A metal spigot shall not,
under any circumstances, be screwed into a PVC socket.
2. Steel Pipe Threaded Joints: Threaded joints shall be made up with teflon
tape, graphite and oil, or other approved compound. Close nipples shall
not be used and when the unthreaded portion of any nipple is less than
1'/cinches, an extra strong nipple shall be used. After joints have been
made up, exposed threads and fittings on steel pipe lines to be buried shall
be coated with Bitumastic 50 Paint or equal.
3. All connections to existing piping systems shall be made as shown or
indicated on the drawings after consultation and cooperation with
authorities of the Owner. Some such connections may have to be made
during off-peak hours.
4. Pipe Sleeves and Wall Castings: Pipe sleeves and wall castings shall be
provided at locations called for on the drawings. These units shall be used
as detailed and of material as noted on the drawings. They shall be
accurately set in concrete or masonry to the elevations shown. All wall
sleeves and castings required in the walls shall be in place when the walls
are poured. End of wall castings and wall sleeves shall be of type
consistent with the piping being connected to them.
5. Tie Rods: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, the size and
number of tie rods for a joint or installation shall be as recommended by
the manufacturer's design chart for working pressure of 150 PSI. Tie rods
shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer.
Cardno TBE Piping, Fittings, Valves and Accessories
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\15050.doc 15050-8
C
f]
B. Underground Piping:
1. Trench excavation and backfill shall conform to the provisions of
Section 02220.
2. Cover on buried piping shall not be less than 30 inches, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Upon satisfactory excavation of the pipe trench and completion of the pipe
bedding, a continuous trough for the pipe barrel and recesses for the pipe
bells, or couplings, shall be excavated by hand digging. When the pipe is
laid in the prepared trench, true to line and grade, the pipe barrel shall
receive continuous, uniform support and no pressure will be exerted on the
pipe joints from the trench bottom.
4. The interior of the pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter
before being gently lowered into the trench and shall be kept clean during
laying operations by means of plugs or other approved methods. During
suspension of work for any reason at any time, a suitable stopper shall be
placed in the end of the pipe last laid to prevent mud or other foreign
material from entering the pipe. Lines shall be laid straight and depth of
cover shall be maintained uniform with respect to finish grade, whether
grading is completed or proposed at time of pipe installation. Where a
grade or slope is shown on the drawings, batter boards with string line
paralleling design grade shall be used by the Contractor to assure
conformance to required grade. No abrupt changes in direction or grade
will be allowed. Any pipe found defective shall be immediately removed
and replaced with sound pipe.
5. Sewer pipe shall be laid with a minimum separation of 10-feet from a
parallel water line.
6. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be placed in polyethylene tube in
accordance with Clow Corporation instructions or approved equal. Tube
joints shall be lapped and tapped with polyethylene adhesive tape.
7. The joints of all pipelines shall be made absolutely tight. The particular
joint to be used shall be approved by the Engineer prior to installation.
Where shown on the plans, or where in the opinion of the Engineer,
settlement vibration is likely to occur, all pipe shall be bolted mechanical
type as specified herein.
8. Mechanical joints shall be made up using annealed high strength cast iron
bolts and rubber gaskets having either plain or duct tip as recommended
by the manufacturer. All types of mechanical joint pipes shall be laid and
jointed in full conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. Only
especially skilled workman shall be permitted to make up mechanical
joints. Torque wrenches set as specified in AWWA Standard C III shall
be used with the permission of the Engineer.
Cardno TBE Piping, Fittings, Valves and Accessories
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\L,IFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\15050.doc: 15050-9 Fcbru
7
9. Push on joints shall be made in strict, complete compliance with the '
manufacturer's recommendations.
10. After pipe has been laid, inspected, and found satisfactory, sufficient '
backfill shall be placed along the pipe barrel to hold the pipe securely in
place during the construction of the preliminary hydrostatic test. No
backfill shall be placed over the joints until the preliminary test is '
satisfactorily completed, leaving them exposed to view for the detection of
visible leaks.
11. Upon satisfactory completion of the preliminary hydrostatic test, '
backfilling of the trench shall be completed.
C. Aboveground and Exposed Piping:
1. Aboveground and exposed pipe fittings, valves and accessories shall be ,
installed as shown or indicated on the drawings.
2. Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the job site
and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing, properly '
clearing all equipment access areas and openings. Changes in sizes shall
be made in accordance with appropriate reducing fittings. Pipe
connections shall be made in accordance with the details shown and '
manufacturer's recommendations. Open ends of pipe lines shall be
properly capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt and other
foreign material out of the system. Pipe supports and hangers shall be '
provided where indicated or as required to insure adequate support of the
piping. '
3. Welded connections shall be made in conformity with the requirements of
AWWA Standard C 206 and shall be done only by qualified welders. The
Engineer, may, at his option, require certificates that welders employed on '
the work are qualified in conformity with the requirements of the standard
and/or sample welds to verify the qualifications of the welders. Before
testing, field welded joints shall be coated with the same material as used '
for coating its pipe in accordance with the requirements of AWWA.
4. Flanged joints shall be made up by inserting the gasket between the
flanges. The threads of the bolts and the faces of the gaskets shall be '
coated with suitable lubricant immediately before installation.
5. Joints using Dresser couplings shall be made up as recommended by the '
manufacturer.
6. Use of perforated band iron (plumber's strap), wire or chain as pipe
hangers will not be acceptable. Supports for pipe less than 11/2-inches '
nominal size shall not be more than eight feet on centers and pipe two
inches nominal size and larger shall be supported at not more than ten feet '
on centers, unless otherwise indicated. Supports for PVC pipe shall be
Cardno TBE Pii*2, Fittin-es, Valves and Accessories 1
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\15050.doc 15050-10 Februan
1
spaced one-half the distance as that specified above unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Valves: Valves shall be carefully inspected during installation; they shall be
opened wide and then tightly closed and the various nuts and bolts shall be tested
for tightness. Special care shall be taken to prevent any foreign matter from
becoming lodged in the valve seat. Valves shall be set plumb at the locations
indicated and in accordance with the details shown on the drawings.
E. Hydrants: Hydrants shall be set plumb and in true alignment with mains. They
shall be securely braced against the end of the trench with concrete thrust blocks
as shown on the drawings and as described and specified in these specifications.
Care shall be taken to insure the free draining of the hydrant barrel and, to this
end, coarse material shall be placed around this valve outlet. Backfilling around
hydrants shall be carefully done so as not to disturb the hydrant and shall be
thoroughly rammed so as to support the hydrant securely.
F. Pipe and Valve Identification: The Contractor shall provide identification
markings on all piping, tubing and valves installed under the various Sections of
the Specifications.
1. Exposed Pipe, Tube and Conduit: Identification on all pipe, tube and
conduit (over 120 volt conductors) inside buildings and outside exposed
work shall be made with plastic snap-on and/or plastic pressure sensitive
adhesive markers lettered with appropriate legend and where applicable
shall have arrows indicating direction of flow. When appropriate legends
and band colors are not available painted on legends and bands will be
acceptable.
2. Underground Pipe and Tube: Pipe and tube shall be located by laying 2-
inch wide plastic tape continuously along the run of pipe or tube. Where
possible, color of tape shall be consistent with the color of bands on
interior pipe and as approved by the Engineer, or shall bear and imprinted
identification of the line. Tape shall be laid approximately 12-inches
below ground surface and directly over pipe location.
3. Valve Identifications: On all valves, except shut-off valves located at a
fixture or piece of equipment, the Contractor shall provide a coded and
numbered tag attached with a brass chain and/or brass "S" hooks.
a. Tag Types: Tags for valves on pipe and tube lines conducting hot
medium (steam, condensate, hot water, etc.) shall be brass or
anodized aluminum. Tags for all other valves shall be colored
plastic. Colors for aluminum or plastic tags shall, where possible,
match the color code of the pipe line on which installed. Square
tags shall be used to indicate normally closed valves and round
tags shall be used to indicate normally open valves.
Cardno TBE Piping, Fittings, Valves and Accessories
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\I5050.doc 15050-11 Febru,
1
b. Coding: In addition to the color coding, each tag shall be stamped
or engraved with wording or abbreviations to indicate the line of
service. All color and letter coding shall be approved by the
Engineer.
4. Valve Schedule: The Contractor shall provide a typewritten list of all
tagged valves giving tag color, shape, letter code and number, the valve
size, type use and general location within the building. Schedule shall be
included in the O & M Manual.
G. Concrete Encasement:
1. Concrete for concrete encasement shall have a minimum strength at 28
days of 2,500 psi and encasement shall be constructed in accordance with
the details shown on the drawings. Encasement shall be constructed
where:
a. The pipe shall have less than adequate cover over the top of the
pipe.
b. A gravity sewer of clay pipe crosses over, or at a depth which
provides less than 18-inches clear distance between pipes when
crossing, under water mains. Encasement shall extend a minimum
of 10-feet on each side of the point of crossing. In lieu of encasing
the clay pipe, the length of pipe to be encased may be constructed
of the same material as the water main.
C. The Engineer shall order the line encased.
2. If through failure to provide suitable trench sheeting, or other causes, the
maximum for trench excavations, as specified elsewhere in the
specifications, is exceeded, the Contractor shall construct concrete
encasement around pipe for the length of excessive excavation.
3. The points of beginning and ending of the pipe encasement shall not be
more than 6-inches from a pipe joint to protect the pipe from cracking due
to uneven settlement of its foundation or the effects of superimposed live
loads.
4. Payment for the above described work is considered incidental and shall
be included in the appropriate bid price.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Flushing: All force mains shall be flushed to remove all sand and other foreign
matter with the velocity of flushing water not less than 4-feet per second.
Flushing shall be terminated at the direction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall
dispose of flushing water without causing a nuisance or property damage.
Cardno TSE Piping, Fittings, Valves and Accessories
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\] 5050.doc 15050-12
1
11
B. Pressure and Leakage Testing: All pumps, gauges and measuring devices shall be
furnished, installed and operated by the Contractor and all such equipment and
devices and their installation shall be approved by the Engineer. All pressure and
leakage testing shall be done in the presence of a representative of the Owner as a
condition precedent to the approval and acceptance of the system. All pipes shall
be thoroughly flushed immediately prior to testing.
C. Hydrostatic Testing for Pressure Piping:
1. Pressure piping installed under this contract shall be subjected to a
hydorstatic leakage/pressure test after the pipe has been installed and
partially backfilled for underground installations. Each test shall be
maintained for at least two hours at 150 PSI pressure during which time all
joints shall be examined for leaks.
2. Before application of test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe.
If permanent air vents are not located at all high points, the Contractor
shall install corporation cocks or fittings and valves at such points so air
can be expelled as the pipe system is slowly filled with water. After
expulsion of air, the corporation cocks, or other blowoff devices shall be
closed and the test pressure applied.
3. Piping runs with two joints or less need not to be pressure tested, but shall
be checked for leakage under normal operating pressures.
4. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves and joints shall be carefully examined
for leaks. All cracked, broken or defective pipe, fittings or valves
discovered as a consequence of this pressure test shall be removed and
replaced with sound material. All leaking, or defective joints shall be
repaired, replaced or corrected.
5. Leakage is defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into the
newly laid pipe or any valved section thereof to maintain the specified test
pressure after the air in the pipeline has been expelled and the pipe has
been filled with water. The allowable limits for leakage of underground
piping shall be determined by the following formula.
D. Allowable Limits for Leakage of Pressure Piping:
1. The hydrostatic pressure tests shall be performed as herein above specified
and no installation, or section thereof, will be acceptable until the leakage
is less than the number of gallons per hour as determined by the formula:
' Cardno TBE Piping, Fittings, Valves and Accessories
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSWTII,.ITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\ I 5050.dou 15050-13
Febrw
f
L= SD Po.S
133200
in which,
L = Allowable Leakage, in gallons per hour
S = Length of pipe being tested in feet
D = Nominal pipe diameter; in inches
P = Average test pressure during the test, in PSI gauge
2. Water shall be supplied to the line during the test period as required to
maintain the test pressure as specified. The quantity used, which shall be
compared to the above allowable quantity, shall be measured by pumping
from a calibrated container. A 5/8-inch meter installed on the discharge
side of the pump may be used to measure the leakage for large mains
when approved by the Engineer.
3. Where leakage exceeds the allowable limit, as specified hereinbefore, the
defective pipe or joints shall be located and repaired. If the defective
portions can not be located, the Contractor shall remove and reconstruct as
much of the work as is necessary in order to conform to the specified
limits. No additional payment will be made for the correction of defective
work, or damage to other parts of the work resulting from such corrective
work.
E. Tests for Drain Lines:
1. Drain lines shall be tested for infiltration and exfiltration.
2. The allowable limits of infiltration and exfiltration or leakage for the drain
lines or any portion thereof shall not exceed a rate of 0.1 gallon per foot of
pipe per 24 hours for all sizes of pipe throughout the system.
3. Any part, or all of the system may be tested for infiltration or exfiltration,
as directed by the Engineer. Prior to testing for infiltration, the system
shall be pumped out so normal infiltration conditions exist at the time of
testing. The amounts of infiltration or exfiltration shall be determined by
pumping into or out of calibrated drums, or by other approved methods.
4. The exfiltration test will be conducted by filling the portion of the system
being tested with water to a level which will provide; a minimum head
lateral connected to the test portion of 2-feet; or, in the event there are no
laterals in the test portion, a minimum difference in elevation between the
crown of the highest portion of the sewer and the test level of 5-feet.
5. Where infiltration or exfiltration exceeds the allowable limits specified
herein, the defective pipe, joints or other faulty construction shall be
located and repaired by the Contractor. If defective portions can not be
located, the Contractor shall remove and reconstruct as much of the work
as is necessary in order to conform to the specified allowable limits.
Cardno TSE Piping Fittings. Valves and Accessories
SAEngiu\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITX PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\15050.doc 15050-14
' 6. The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and materials and shall
conduct all testing required, under the direction of the Engineer. No
separate payment will be made for this work and the cost for this work
' shall be included in the prices quoted in this Proposal.
fl
END OF SECTION
1 Cardno TSE Piping, Fittings, Valves and Accessories
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSWTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\ I 5050.doc 15050-15 Febm
1
SECTION 16050
ELECTRICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the modifications
required to the field devices for the City of Clearwater's Pump Station 41
Replacement project as hereinafter specified and shown on the Drawings.
B. The work, apparatus and materials, which shall be furnished under these
Specifications and accompanying Drawings, shall include all items listed hereinafter
and/or shown on the Drawings. Certain equipment, which will require wiring thereto
and/or complete installation, is indicated. All materials necessary for the complete
installation shall be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR to provide
complete power, instrumentation, wiring and control systems as indicated on the
Drawings and/or as specified herein.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the necessary cables, protective
devices, conductors, supports, raceways, exterior electrical system, etc., to serve
loads as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified.
D. The work shall include complete testing of all equipment and wiring at the
completion of the work and making any minor connection changes or adjustments
necessary for the proper functioning of the system and equipment. All workmanship
shall be of the highest quality; sub-standard work will be rejected.
E. It is the intent of these Specifications that the electrical system shall be suitable in
every way for the service required. All material and all work, which may be
reasonably implied as being incidental to the work of this Section, shall be furnished
at no extra cost.
F. Famish and install a complete system of conduit as herein specified and shown on
the drawings.
1.02 CODES, INSPECTION AND FEES
1
1
1
A. All material and installation shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the
National Electrical Code and all applicable national, local and state codes, laws and
ordinances.
B. Pay all fees required for permits and inspections.
Cardno TBE Electrical - General Provisions
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20I0\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16050.doc 16050-1 Fcbru;
1.03 TESTS
A. Test all systems and repair or replace all defective work. Make all necessary
adjustments to the systems and instruct OWNER's personnel in the proper operation
of the systems.
B. The following minimum tests and checks shall be made prior to the energizing of
electrical equipment. Test shall be by the CONTRACTOR and a certified test report
shall be submitted providing all test results and stating that the equipment meets and
operates in accordance with the Manufacturer's and job specifications, and that
equipment and installation conforms to all applicable Standards and Specifications:
1. Test all 600-volt wire insulation with a megohm meter after installation.
Make tests at not less than 1000 volts. Submit a written test report of the
results to the engineer.
2. Mechanical inspection of all circuit breakers to assure proper operation.
C. The Engineer shall be notified forty-eight (48) hours before tests are made to enable
the Owner to have designated personnel present.
1.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. All cutting and patching shall be done in a thoroughly workmanlike manner.
1.05 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
A. The Drawings are not intended to show exact locations of conduit runs.
B. All three-phase circuits shall be run in separate conduits unless otherwise shown on
the Drawings.
C. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, conduit shown exposed shall be installed
exposed; conduit shown concealed shall be installed concealed.
D. Where circuits are shown as "home-runs," all necessary fittings and boxes shall be
provided for a complete raceway installation.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall harmonize the work of the different trades so that
interferences between conduits, piping, equipment, architectural and structural work
will be avoided. All necessary offsets shall be furnished so as to take up a minimum
space and all such offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish this shall be furnished
and installed by the CONTRACTOR without additional expense to the Owner. In
Cardno TBE Electrical - General Provisions
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20 I O\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16050,doc 16050-2
1
1
1
1
case interference develops, the Owner's authorized representative is to decide which
equipment, piping, etc., must be relocated, regardless of which was installed first.
F. The locations of equipment, outlets, and similar devices shown on the Drawings are
approximate only. Exact locations shall be as approved by the Engineer during
construction. Obtain in the field all information relevant to the placing of electrical
work and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the
Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an
approved manner.
G. Circuit layouts shown are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other
installation details. Furnish all labor and materials necessary to install and place in
satisfactory operation all power, lighting, and other electrical systems shown.
Additional circuits shall be installed wherever needed to conform to the specific
requirements of the equipment.
H. The ratings of motors and other electrically operated devices together with the size
shown for their branch circuit conductors and conduits are approximate only and are
indicative of the probable power requirements insofar as they can be determined in
advance of the purchase of equipment.
1. All connections to equipment shall be made as shown, specified and directed and in
accordance with the approved shop drawings, regardless of the number of conductors
shown on the Electrical Drawings.
1.06 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. As the work progresses, legibly record all field changes on a set of project Contract
Drawings. When the project is complete, furnish a complete set of reproducible "As-
built" drawings for the Project Record Documents.
1.07 COMPONENT INTERCONNECTIONS
A. Component equipment furnished under this Specification will not be furnished as
integrated systems.
B. Analyze all systems components and their shop drawings; identify all terminals and
prepare drawings or wiring tables necessary for component interconnection.
1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. As specified under other Sections, shop drawings shall be submitted for approval for
all materials, equipment, apparatus, and other items as required by the Engineer.
B. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following equipment:
1
1
Carduo TBE Electrical - General Provisions
S-. Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16050.dou 16050-3 Febm
1. Pump Control Cabinet
2. Disconnect
3. Area Light and Concrete Pole
4. Meter Can
5. Float Switches
6. Pressure Transmitter
7. Conductors
8. Conduit
C. The Manufacturer's name and product designation and catalog cutsheets shall be
submitted for the following material:
1. Conduit
D. Prior to submittal by the CONTRACTOR, all shop drawings shall be checked for
accuracy and contract requirements. Shop drawings shall bear the date checked and
shall be accompanied by a statement that the shop drawings have been examined for
conformity to Specifications and Drawings. This statement shall also list all
discrepancies with the Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings not so checked
and noted shall be returned.
E. The Engineer's check shall be only for conformance with the design concept of the
proj ect and compliance with the Specifications and Drawings. The responsibility of,
or the necessity of, furnishing materials and workmanship required by the
Specifications and Drawings, which may not be indicated on the shop drawings, is
included under the work of this Section.
F. The responsibility for all dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site
and for coordination of this work with the work of all other trades is also included
under the work of this Section.
G. No material shall be ordered or shop work started until the Engineer's approval of
shop drawings has been given.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Provide a warranty for all the electrical equipment in accordance with the
requirements of other Sections. Under no circumstances shall the warranty be for
less than one year starting from substantial completion.
Cardno TSE Electrical - General Provisions
S.Migin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16050.doc 16050-4
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
1 Cardno TBE Electrical - General Provisions
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16050.doc 16050-5 Febru
1
PART 1- GENERAL
SECTION 16100
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. All work shall be executed in a neat and workmanlike manner by experienced and
capable electricians so as to present a neat installation upon completion. -
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical work shall be performed in accordance with the current standards of the
electrical trades. The provisions of the NEC and existing local requirements shall
comprise the minimum acceptable standards of electrical work.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING, & ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment and material shall be suitably delivered and stored in the original
containers, but shall be readily accessible for inspection. All items subject to
moisture damage shall be stored in dry spaces. All material and equipment shall be
protected against dirt, dust, water and chemical or mechanical injury, vandalism and
theft. Upon completion of the work all equipment and materials shall be cleaned
thoroughly, polished and finished in a condition satisfactory to the OWNER.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I 2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. All equipment and materials shall be new and shall bear the manufacturer's name,
trade name, and the UL label. In cases where a standard has been established for a
particular material, the material shall be so labeled. The equipment to be furnished
shall be essentially the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
' production of the required type of equipment for this type of work and shall be the
manufacturer's latest approved design.
' 2.02 ACCESSORIES
1 A. Clamps, screws, fasteners and support devices shall be of noncorrosive metal.
Cardno TBE Basic Materials and Methods
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSMILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16100.doc 16100-1
Febru
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangements of
the electrical work. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully examine the Drawings and
shall ascertain that the equipment and accessories will be properly located and readily
accessible.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment and appurtenances furnished by various manufacturers shall be installed
in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and approved wiring
diagrams for type and capacity of each piece of equipment used. These instructions
shall be considered as part of these Specifications. Any OWNER-furnished
equipment shall be connected by the CONTRACTOR, including all necessary cords
and plugs.
B. Dimensions shown on the drawings are based on the information provided by the
manufacturer for specific models indicated. The contractor shall be responsible for
insuring proper clearances, coordination with other equipment, etc. for any
substitutions to the equipment used as the basis for the design.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TB E Basic Materials and Methods
&\Engin ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\20 I O\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16100.duc 16100-2
SECTION 16110
PART 1- GENERAL
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. All exposed, exterior conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized, zinc-coated, rigid
threaded conduit unless otherwise indicated or shown.
B. All conduit installed below grade shall be rigid non-metallic heavy wall conduit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Metallic Conduit and Fittings : Electric metallic conduit shall be standard,
galvanized, heavy-wall rigid steel conduit conforming to Federal Specification WW-
C-581. Steel elbows and couplings shall be hot-dipped galvanized. Fittings of
standard galvanized malleable iron conforming to Federal Specification W-F-406
shall be used. Metallic conduit may be used for both exposed and concealed work.
The use of dissimilar metals shall be avoided throughout the system. Installation
methods of metallic conduit shall be in accordance with Sections 348-4 through 348-
13 of the NEC.
B. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit and Fittings : Rigid non-metallic conduit and fittings of
heavy wall polyvinyl chloride (PVC) meeting ASTM Specification D 1785, approved
by UL for the specific purpose, may be used in locations not prohibited by the NEC
Section 347-3. When equipment grounding is required by Article 250 of the NEC, a
separate grounding conductor shall be installed in the conduit. Installation methods of
rigid non-metallic conduit shall conform to Section 347-5 through 347-15 of the
NEC. Supports shall be in accordance with Table 347-8.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
' A. Exposed conduit shall run parallel. Concealed conduits shall be run in a direct line
with long sweep bends and offsets. Conduit shall be continuous and installed in such
a manner that the system shall be electrically continuous throughout. Conduit ends
' shall be capped during construction. The ends of all conduits shall be carefully
reamed free from burrs after threading and before installation. All cuts shall be made
' Cardno TBE Raceways and Fittings
SAEngin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16110.doc 16110-1
Fehru;
square. All joints shall be made up tight. Care shall be taken to see that all control t
and power conduit runs form a permanent and continuous ground connection point.
B. The Contractor shall permanently and effectively ground service neutral and all '
raceways, devices, and utilized equipment in accordance with the requirements of the
NEC, and as shown or required. All grounding electrodes shall have rigid clamp jaws
and be UL listed for the application. A separate ground wire shall be provided in all '
control and power raceways.
'
C. Conduit stubs shall be located to conform to location of connection boxes on motors
and/or other equipment served. Traps in conduit runs shall be avoided.
1
D. Conductors shall be installed in a workmanlike manner. Damage to insulation or a
reduction of the wire size when pulled into the conduit shall be avoided.
'
E. All areas of the project are considered to be wet locations and construction within
these areas shall be moisture and weather resistant. Work below grade, on grade, or
beneath slabs shall be waterproof. ,
F. Electrical work shall not rest upon, be supported by or hung from ductwork, piping or
equipment. Adequate supports shall be provided to assure that this is achieved. '
G. Boxes, conduit, hangers, panels, etc., shall be fastened to steel by machine bolts and
nuts, and by expansion bolts in concrete. Wood or composition plugs shall not be '
used.
H. Where installations pass through walls, slabs, or other structures, all cutting shall be '
accomplished without damage to the structure. Boring and cutting shall be done with
proper equipment and without delivering excessive vibration or shock to the
structure. '
I. The contractor shall install long radius 90 degree bends on all changes of direction in I
conduits. Factory 90 degree bends will not be accepted.
END OF SECTION 1
Cardno TBE Raceways and Fittings I
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16110.doc 16110-2 Februan
u
SECTION.16120
PART 1- GENERAL
WIRES AND CABLES
1.01 SCOPE
A. This section includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of all low voltage
and power wiring. This shall include all wires and cables utilized for controls.
Conductors specified for low voltage controls shall be coordinated with and approved
by equipment manufacturers.
B. Control wiring specified herein shall be installed and connected by the Electrical
Contractor to perform the functions specified in other sections of these specifications.
C. REFERENCE STANDARDS: The following specifications and standards, except as
hereinafter modified, are incorporated herein by reference and form a part of this
specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto. Except where a specific
date is given, the issue in effect (including amendments, addenda, revisions,
supplements, and errata) on the date of Invitation for Bids shall be applicable. In text
such specifications and standards are referred to by basic designation only.
1) Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.)
J-C-30A(1) - Cable and Wire Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation)
HH-1-595C - Insulation Tape, Electrical, Pressure Sensitive
Adhesive, Plastic
2) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) WIRES AND
CABLES
3) Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc (UL) Publications:
No. 83 - Thermoplastic - Insulated Wires
No. 493 - Thermoplastic - Insulated Underground Feeder and
Branch Circuit Cables
No. 486 - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Conductors shall consist of annealed copper wire having a minimum of 98%
conductivity and shall be sized and insulated or isolated in accordance with the NEC
Cardno TBE Wires and Cables
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSMILITY PROJECTS\20IO\LIFI STATION 41 REPAIRS\16120.doc 16120-1
Febru,
for the current and voltage of the individual circuit. All conductors, unless
specifically noted, shall have type " THWN", 75 degrees F, 600 Volt insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION ,
3.01 INSTALLATION ,
A. All conductors shall be coded throughout, using different colors for phases, white for ,
neutral (white with other color stripe for neutral of a different voltage system) and
green for ground. The same color code for a particular phase or part of a circuit shall
be run with the same conductor throughout the job. Colors used for each voltage ,
system shall be different. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger may be black in color
but shall be identified with colored tape in all outlet, junction or pull boxes and at the
terminals of the equipment. ,
Phase 120/208V, 3PH, System
A Black 1
B Red
C Blue
Neutral White ,
Ground Green
B. All wires in cabinets, boxes, panels, pull and junction boxes shall be trained neatly ,
and tied.
C. All wires and cables, larger than No. 12 AWG, shall be continuous from origin to '
destination without splices unless written permission is given by the ENGINEER.
D. Conductors shall be sized in accordance with NEC requirements. No conductor shall
be smaller than No. 12 AWG, cxccpt control and signal circuit conductors which may
be No. 14 AWG, unless otherwise specified on the drawings. ,
3.02 TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES
A. Power Conductors: Terminations shall be die type or set screw type pressure ,
connectors as specified. Splices (where allowed) shall be die type compression
connector and waterproof with heat shrink boot or epoxy filling. '
B. Control Conductors: Termination on saddle-type terminals shall be wired directly with
a maximum of two conductors per termination. Termination on screw type terminals '
shall be made with a maximum of two spade connectors.
C. Instrumentation Signal Conductors: Terminations permitted shall be typical of control '
conductors. Splices are allowed at instrumentation terminal boxes only.
Cardno TB)Er Wires and Cables 1
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16120,doc 16120-2 Februan
1
' D. Splices (of any type) shall not be allowed. All conductors shall be continuous from
termination point to termination point.
1
1
END OF SECTION
1 Cardno TBE Wires and Cables
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16120.doc 16120-3 Febru
1
1
SECTION 16170
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Main Disconnect: A main disconnecting means meeting the requirements of the
NEC shall be furnished and installed for the electrical service as shown on the
drawings. The main disconnect shall be a fused disconnect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCESSORIES
A. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers for all branch circuits shall be molded-case unit
breakers with thermal-magnetic trips designed to open all phases simultaneously
under overload and/or fault conditions. Breakers shall be of adequate rating for the
actual duty required. The breaker shall have quick-make, quick-break, toggle
mechanism, inverse-time trip characteristics, and shall be trip-free on overload or
short-circuit. Automatic release is to be secured by a bimetallic thermal element
releasing the mechanism latch. In addition, a magnetic armature shall be provided
to trip the breaker instantaneously for short circuit currents above the overload
range. Automatic tripping shall be indicated by a handle position between the
manual OFF and ON position. The trip mechanism shall be a combination
thermal-magnetic type. Thermal elements shall inverse time characteristics for
overload conditions and magnetic trip element shall protect against short circuits
by providing instantaneous trip. Main and Emergency circuit breakers shall be
mechanically interlocked so that the two breakers may not both be in the "ON"
position simulatenously.
B. Safety Switches: All safety switches shall be heavy-duty type "HD". The blades of
switches shall be quick-make, quick-break operating type. All lugs on all switches
shall be equal to Burdy's solderless quick lugs or shall be compression type.
Switches shall have the number of poles and be of the size indicated. Enclosures
shall be of the NEMA type indicated on the drawings. The switch shall conform to
NEMA Standards and shall be UL listed. Switches shall be equal to General
Electric, Square-D, or Cutler-Hammer.
Cardno TBE Overcurrent Protective Devices
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTSWTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\] 6170.doc 16170-1 Febni,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install overcurrent protective devices as recommended by the manufacturer,
required by Code, and as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TBE Overcurrent Protective Devices 1
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRSU6170.doc 16170-2 Februar
1
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included under this section of the specifications consists of furnishing
all materials and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for
the complete installation of an area lighting fixture, including all related systems
and accessories, as shown on the drawing or hereinafter specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURE
A. Materials.
1. Lighting Fixture shall be as specified in the lighting fixture schedule on
the drawings and as specified herein.
2. All high intensity discharge lamp ballasts shall be constant wattage or
auto-regulator, high power factor type and internally fused.
3. Fixture shall bear the U.L. label.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten fixture securely to provide adequate support.
B. Ensure that lighting fixture is plumb.
END OF SECTION
Cardoo TSE Li htin Fixtures
S:\Engin\ENGiNEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\ I 6500.doc 16500-1 Febru
1
1.1
SECTION 16941
PUMP STATION ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
PART1-GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for complete
electrical system at the City of Clearwater's Pump Station 41, as hereinafter specified
and shown on the Drawings.
1.02 CODES
A. All material and installation shall be in accordance with the 2005 edition of the
National Electrical Code (N.E.C.), and NFPA 70 code articles that are applicable to
the minimum electrical installation requirements for sewer lift stations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The materials used in all systems shall be new, unused and as hereinafter specified.
All materials where not specified shall be of the very best of their respective kinds.
Samples of materials or Manufacturer's specifications shall be submitted for approval
as required by the Engineer.
B. Materials and equipment used shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed and
conform with applicable standards of NEMA and ANSI.
C. Electrical equipment shall, at all times during construction, be adequately protected
against mechanical injuryor damage by water. Electrical equipment shall not be
stored out-of-doors. Electrical equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters.
If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by the
CONTRACTOR at his expense. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury
by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and put through such special tests as
directed by the Engineer, at the cost and expense of the CONTRACTOR, or shall be
replaced by the CONTRACTOR at his own expense.
2.02 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
A. All raceways installed above grade shall be galvanized rigid steel conduit.
B. All raceways installed below grade shall be rigid PVC conduit.
Cardno TBE Pum Station Electrical Provisions
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\ 1694 Ldoc 16941-1
Februc
1
11
C. Raceways containing pump cables, float cables and pressure transducer cable '
entering the wet well shall be rigid PVC conduit. '
D. Raceways installed below grade for antenna coaxial cable shall be PVC schedule 80
conduit. '
E. Where conduit is cut, the inside edge shall be reamed smooth to prevent injury to
conductors. ,
2.03 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors shall be copper. Power circuits shall have 600 volt insulation
(Underwriters' approved Type THAN). Conductors shall be color coded in
accordance with the NEC. '
B. All motor controls, remote indicating lights, alarm circuits and metering loops shall
be wired with #12 stranded copper conductors. Insulation shall be THHN. An ,
overall PVC jacket shall be provided for multi-conductor cables where required by
the drawings.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. Boxes and Fittings:
1. Junction box utilized for termination of pump cables, float cables and '
pressure transducer cable shall be stainless steel or aluminum and
explosionproof as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds Co., Appleton Electric Co.,
or approved equal. '
2. Conduit hubs shall be used for all outdoor conduit terminations and shall be
as manufactured by Meyers Electric Products, hie., Raco Div., Appleton
Electric Co., or approved equal '
3. Conduit sealing bushings shall be O.Z./Gedney Type CSB or approved equal.
2.05 PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM ,
A. Panel Construction:
1. The electrical control equipment shall be mounted within a NEMA Type 4X, '
dead front enclosure, constructed of not less than #14 gauge stainless steel. '
The enclosure shall be equipped with an inner aluminum door and shall
incorporate a removable back panel on which control components shall be
mounted. Back panel shall be secured to enclosure with collar studs. Outer '
panel door shall be equipped with door stop.
Cardno TBE Pump Station Electrical Provisions
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16941.doc 16941-2 Februan
fl
1
B. Panel Components:
1. Enclosure: Enclosure shall be NEMA 4X by Hoffinan or approved equivalent
with a heavy-duty padlock hasp. Enclosure shall be 316 Stainless Steel.
2. Inner Safety Door: Panel shall include one aluminum inner safety door, 12
gauge nominal thickness (minimum) with 3/4-inch, 90 degree break bend on
all edges for rigidity; full length aluminum hinge; positive twist lock handle;
safety latch to keep door open during maintenance.
3. Main Circuit Breaker: The panel shall include main circuit breaker sized as
indicated for main power disconnect. The breaker shall be mounted on the
subpanel with handle through the inner door.
4. Emergency Circuit Breaker: The panel shall include an emergency circuit
breaker sized as indicated for disconnecting emergency source. The breaker
shall be mounted on the subpanel with handle through the inner door.
5. Alarm System: The panel shall include a vapor-proof red light mounted on
the exterior of the cabinet as shown on the drawings for alarm visual
indication and a weatherproof horn mounted on the exterior of the cabinet.
The alarm light and horn shall be prewired to the DataFlow TCU to operate
on alarm conditions via signals from both the TCU and associated cabinet
relays. An alarm silence push button labeled "Alarm Silence" shall be
mounted on the outside of the enclosure and shall be wired to the DataFlow
TCU which will silence the horn under all conditions, and automatically reset
when the alarm condition is corrected. The alarm system shall be manually
reset.
NOTE: Alarm light to be designed and positioned to provide unobstructed
access for changing light bulb.
6. Convenience Receptacle: The panel shall have GFI (ground fault interrupter)
type convenience receptacle mounted on the inner door to provide plug-in
120V power with ground fault protection.
7. Seal Failure Indicator: The panel shall have a seal failure (leak detector)
indicator pilot light for each pump. These pilot lights shall be operated by
moisture sensing monitors which are signaled by probes supplied in each
pump. Momentary test switches to simulate seal failure to be included and so
marked with permanent weatherproof nameplates.
8. All motor branch circuit breakers, motor starter and control relays shall be of
highest industrial quality, securely fastened to the removal back panels with
screws and lock washers. Back panels shall be tapped to accept all mounting
screws. Self-tapping screws shall not be used to mount any component.
9. A magnetic air circuit breaker, Type FA as manufactured by Square D
Company, or approved equal, shall be furnished for the pump motor. Circuit
breaker shall be adequately sized to meet the pump motor and station
operating conditions.
Cardno TBE Pump Station Electrical Provisions
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16941.doc 16941-3 Febru;
10. A mechanical disconnect mechanism shall be installed on each circuit breaker ,
to provide a means of disconnecting power to the pump motor. These may
protrude through inner aluminum door.
11.
Pump starters shall be full voltage type rated for 3-phase operation. '
Overloads shall be provided and be class 20 b1-metallic. Two (2) auxiliary
contacts and line and load termination points shall be provided. The starter
ratings shall be as indicated on the drawings, however, if the final selection of '
the pump motor provided exceeds the capacity of the starter size indicated on
the drawings the contractor shall provide the next higher starter size at no
additional cost. The contractor shall indicate the proper selection of the starter
size (based on pump motor submitted and operation on a 208V, 3-phase
power source) during the shop drawing process. The starters shall be Allen- '
Bradley, Square D or approved equal.
12. Relays shall be 3PDT with 10 ampere contacts. Coil voltages as per the
drawings. Relays shall be Square-D Class 9001 Type KU 13 with appropriate '
voltage code.
13. Motor Ground Fault Relays shall be 120V with auto reset. Bender
Cat#RCM465Y. '
14. Phase Monitor shall be 208V, adjustable, DPDT. Diversified Electronics
Cat# SLA-230-ALE.
15. Intrinsically Safe Relays for float switches shall be 24V AC, Diversified ,
Electronics Cat# ISO-24-AFN.
C. Operating Controls and Instruments: 1
1. All operating controls and instruments shall be securely mounted on the '
control compartment door. All controls and instruments shall be clearly
labeled to indicate function.
2. Indicator lamps shall be mounted in oil-tight modules, as manufactured by '
Allen-Bradley, Square D or approved equal. Lamp modules shall be
equipped to operate at 120 volt input. Lamps shall be easily replaceable from
the front of the control compartment door without removing lamp module '
from its mounted position.
3. Control and installation schematics are shown on the drawings. It is the
intent of these specifications that the pump control will be provided by the '
Data Flow TCU.
F. Manufacturer: '
1. Control Panel shall be manufactured by Unitron Controls, C2i Controls, ITT
Flygt, or approved equal. 1
Cardno TBE Pump Station Electrical Provisions I
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16941.doc 16941-4 Februar
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
G. Installation:
1. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, top of cabinets shall be mounted six
feet above grade, properly aligned and adequately supported independently of
the connecting raceways.
2. All wiring in the control panel shall be neatly formed, grouped, and identified
to provide a neat and orderly appearance.
3. All nameplates shall be properly secured.
2.06 PUMP CONTROL UNIT
A. Pump Control Unit - The pump control unit shall be installed in the pump control
cabinet and shall be a microprocessor-based multi-pump telemetry/controller
designed for use with City of Clearwater's existing telemetry system. As a minimum
the pump control unit shall have the following features:
1. 12 digital inputs.
2. 4 digital control outputs.
3. 2 analog inputs with 12 bit accuracy.
4. Automatic control shall be from local inputs. All the electronics for each
type of input shall be included in the control unit.
5. Local manual control provided by HOA switches. The HOA switches shall
be fail safe and operate in the OFF and HAND position without power. HOA
Switch Alarms shall be reported back to central site computer. Alarms shall
indicate that an HOA switch has been left in the HAND or OFF position.
6. Remote control from the central site computer shall provide individual pump
overrides and disables, station and alarm disables.
7. Triplex/Duplex/Simplex configurable. The module shall have the capability
of being configured for one, two or three pumps.
8. Pump alternation function shall be provided. Alternation around non-
operational pumps shall be provided.
9. An integral 240 VAC three-phase monitor shall be provided in the control
unit. The phase monitor shall detect loss of phase, phase reversal, low phase
and high phase faults. All phase monitor adjustments shall be adjustable
from the keyboard. Phase voltages from phase A to B and from phase A to C
shall be transmitted to the central site computer.
10. The control unit shall be easily replaced by removing two industry standard
terminal connectors.
11. Alarm light and bell outputs capable of driving 120 VAC loads to 1 amp.
12. Local input for alarm silence switch.
13. Remote alarm bell and light disable from central site computer.
14. High level alarm reporting back to central site computer when the high level
float reaches the appropriate level.
Cardno TBE Pum Station Electrical Provisions
S:\F.ngin\F,NGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16941.doc 16941-5 Febm
1
15. The control unit shall utilize a 16-character display to provide the operators
with the elapsed runtime of each pump, the average runtime of each pump,
the flow of each pump, the flow of the station and the time of day.
16. Pumps/Starter/Breaker Fault alarms shall be reported back to central site
computer. The alarms shall be activated when a pump is called to run, but
fails to run, or if the pump is turned off by the control unit, but continues to
run.
17. Pump run status shall be reported back to central site computer. Pump run
times recorded with 2 second accuracy.
18. Configuration parameters shall be adjustable through the front mounted
keypad or a RS-232 service port.
19. Redundancy of level sensing devices shall be supported.
20. All inputs and outputs shall be optically or magnetically isolated and surge
suppressed.
21. Provide integral Radio that is microprocessor controlled and functions as the
interface between the Pump Control Unit and the central site equipment. The
unit shall house the radio transceiver and associated electronics to allow the
Pump Control Unit to communicate with central site. The Radio shall have
the following features:
a) Environmentally sealed/ corrosion resistant enclosure.
b) Conformally coated PC Board.
C) Surge protected radio power.
d) On board communications and functional firmware.
e) Watchdog Timer.
f) On board voltage regulation and radio power supply control.
g) LEDs on test mode, power, transmit data, receive data, and CPU
failure.
h) Test mode switch for radio service.
i) Radio current, receiver sensitivity and operating temperature are
monitored for system diagnostics.
B. The following is a list 6f the minimum SCADA input and output requirements
1. Discrete Inputs:
a) Pump Running (Each of 2 Pumps)
b) Pump Faulted (Each of 2 Pumps)
C) Pump Thermal Alarm (Each of 2 pumps)
d) High Level Alarm
C) Low Level Alarm
f) Power Failure
2. Discrete Outputs:
a) MASTER Control Relay
Cardno TBE Pump Station Electrical Provisions
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16941.doc 16941-6
' 3. Analog Inputs:
' a) Wetwell Level (Submersible Pressure Transducer)
C. The Pump Control Unit shall be a TAC PACK TELEMETRY CONTROL UNIT as
manufactured by Data Flow Systems, Inc. of Melbourne, Florida.
' 2.07 ANTENNA SUBSYSTEM O BE CRATED AND DELIVERED TO THE OWNER
(T )
' A. Specifications for Antenna Subsystem are subject to change based on requirements of
Data Flow Systems. It is the intent of the design to reuse the existing antenna located
1 at Pump Station 41. However, final approval to do so shall be per Data Flow
Systems. The contractor shall include in his/her base bid the cost to provide a new
antenna for the Pump Station replacement.
' B. Antenna Support - The Antenna shall be supported on a mast/pole and have DC
grounding for lightning protection. The antenna mast/pole shall be hot dipped
t galvanized for corrosion protection. All mounting hardware shall be made of
stainless steel. The mast shall meet or exceed the quality and reliability of the AG20
manufactured by Rohn. The coax cable shall be the type that utilizes an inert
' semi-liquid compound to flood the copper braid. The coax cable shall meet or
exceed the quality, reliability and performance of VB-8 manufactured by DB
Products, Inc. of Dallas, Texas. Type N connectors shall be utilized at both ends of
' the coax. The Type N connectors shall be sealed with 3 inch sections of Alpha
FIT321-1-0 sealant shrink tubing. The coax cable shall be secured to the mast/pole
with E.V.A.-coated 316 stainless steel cable ties. The cable ties shall meet or exceed
' the quality, reliability and performance of AE 112 cable ties manufactured by Band-It.
The antenna shall be constructed with heavy-wall tubing elements and large,
' rugged-machined aluminum blocks for the boom-to-element junctions. The antennas
shall meet or exceed the quality, reliability and performance of the PLC-451 ON
manufactured by Cushcra$/Signals of Manchester, New Hampshire. The
' antenna/tower shall be designed to meet 150 MPH wind loading without damage.
Sealed engineering drawings from a Florida professional engineer shall be submitted
to the Engineer to verify the design. Grounding for the antenna, antenna mast/pole,
1 etc shall be per the specifications of Data Flow Systems. The contractor shall
coordinate all grounding requirements with the supplier.
2.08 SUBMERSIBLE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
A. The level sensor for controlling the sewage level in wet wells shall consist of a
submersible bonded strain gauge pressure-sensing element, encased in a watertight
case with a 316 stainless steel FM approved explosion resistant body. It shall be
' supplied with 40 feet of shielded and vented cable, able to withstand 200 pounds of
tensile strength, allowing the transducer to be suspended directly by it's own cable.
The cable shall be connected directly to the signal input terminals on the main control
1
Cardno TBE _ Pump Station Electrical Provisions
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16941.doc 16941-7
Febm
panel with no intervening junction box or calibration device required. The device '
shall require a 10-30 VDC low voltage power supply. The output shall be a standard
4-20 MADC control signal, factory set proportional to the selected fixed range of the '
transducer, and shall have an accuracy of C0.5% across the temperature band, with a
one year stability of C0.2% FSO.
B. The transducer shall be an FM approved Explosion Proof* Unit and when used with t
a vented cable, shall be FM approved intrinsically safe when used with an approved
barrier (supplied by the customer). The transducer shall meet DO 160 for lightening
and surge protection for FAA and MILSTD test and launch standard electrical surge
requirements.
C. The transducer shall be provided with a sealed airbag for compensating for
atmospheric changes and to insure that no external moisture reaches the internal
electronics. The nose of the transducer shall be threaded onto a protective device
consisting of the top half of a 316 stainless steel chemical seal with a welded 316s/s '
diaphragm. The fill fluid shall be glycerin or silicone depending on the extremes of
the temperatures expected to be encountered. Eight 304 stainless steel spacers and
bolts and nuts hold a stand-off ring in position so as to fully protect the diaphragm '
from the debris frequently encountered in lift stations.
D. Analog signals shall be communicated using shielded stranded signal cable with '
braided shield and water proof jacket, suitable for the service intended. The
transducer supplier shall provide the signal cable of a length required for the
installation, coordinate the installation of the signal wiring, and provide appropriate '
installation procedures.
E. This device shall be the Birdcage® Lift Station Sensor as assembled and fabricated '
by Blue Ribbon Industrial Components Corp. Winter Park, FL., incorporating the
GP50 model 3112 submersible transducer, or equal. '
4
'
2.09 FLOATS
A. Levels shall be sensed by polypropylene weighted floats. The floats shall be heavy- '
duty type, with hermitically sealed non-mercury switches inside. Weights shall be 20
ounces minimum. The floats shall be secured at the top of the wetwell via a stainless
steel wall mount bracket designed specifically for float installation. The floats shall t
be B/W 7000 Series or approved equal.
2.10 ANALOG LOOP SUPPLY AND INTRINSICALLY SAFE RELAY 1
A. The submersible pressure transducer shall be provided with a regulated power supply
from the DataFlow TCU. '
Cardno TBE Pum Station Electrical Provisions 1
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\ 1694 Ldoc 16941-8 Februan
1
1
1
1
B. The pressure transmitter shall be isolated from the hazardous area by an intrinsically
safe relay, Stahl catalog # 9001/012-80-110-10.
2.11 GENERATOR RECEPTACLE
A. The generator receptacle shall be 240V,125 Amp, 3-phase, 4-wire with ground. The
contractor shall coordinate the generator receptacle requirements with the City of
Clearwater to insure the generator receptacle is compatible with the City's existing
fleet of portable generators.
2.12 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE (SPD)
A. The pump control panel shall be protected by a surge protection device compatible
with a 208V, 3-phase, 4-wire system. The SPD shall have a NEMA 4X enclosure.
The SPD shall be an Advanced Protection Technologies (APT) Cat# TE/2XF/4X.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. Where conduits enter or leave all outlet boxes, cabinets safety switches, tap boxes,
motor controllers, etc., threaded hubs shall be used. Bushings 1-inch and larger shall
be of an approved insulated type. Unless otherwise indicated, conduit 2-inches shall
be supported at intervals not exceeding ten (10) feet.
B. During construction, all installed raceways shall be temporarily plugged or otherwise
protected from the entrance of moisture, dirt, trash, plaster, moisture, etc., through
neglect of the CONTRACTOR to so protect them, shall be. replaced by the
CONTRACTOR without additional expense to the Owner. No kinked, clogged or
deformed raceways will be permitted on the job. Raceways shall be cut to proper
length so that ends will fit accurately in the outlets. Where raceways cross building
expansion joints, a suitable raceway expansion fitting shall be used.
C. Size of raceway shall not be less than NEC requirements, but in no case shall be less
than indicated on the Drawings. Combining of circuits, other than detailed, will not
be permitted. The CONTRACTOR shall install larger size raceways than detailed
where there is excessive length of unbroken run or excessive number of bends.
' D. Bends in metallic raceways shall be made while "cold" and in no case shall the
raceways be heated. Raceways shall not be bent through more than 90°. The radius
of bends shall not be less than six (6) times the internal diameter of the raceway. Not
' more than four (4) (equivalent 90°) bends will be permitted between outlets, the
bends at the outlets being counted.
' Cardno TBE Pum Station Electrical Provisions
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16941.doc 16941-9
1
Februz
E. Raceways shall be properly aligned, grouped and supported. Exposed raceways shall '
be installed at the right angles to or parallel to the principal structural members.
Concealed raceways, unless otherwise indicated, may take the most direct route '
between outlets. Raceways shall be firmly held in place. Raceways shall run to
avoid trapping wherever possible. Where areas are indicated for future openings,
foundations, etc., all raceways shall be run around such areas. The CONTRACTOR '
shall provide necessary inserts in poured concrete areas and shall furnish and install
all necessary sleeves through walls, floors and roofs for passage of raceways.
Sleeves through roofs and/or exterior walls shall be properly sealed by the ,
CONTRACTOR against entrance of moisture, etc., into the building. Where
necessary repairs to the building structure using material in no way inferior to that
originally installed and using labor skilled in the trades involved. '
3.02 CONDUCTORS
A. Taps and attachments of fittings and lugs shall be electrically and mechanically '
secure. Approved solderless lugs and connectors shall be sued for all conductors
with 2-bolt type being used for sized No. 4/0 and larger. There shall be plenty of '
slack cable in boxes, outlets and cabinets to insure that there is no binding at the
bushings. All lugs shall be of the correct sizes for the conductor in order to fit the '
conductor into a lug.
B. No splices of any type will be allowed. Conductors shall be continuous from '
termination point to termination point.
3.03 GROUNDING
A. The entire electrical system shall be completely and effectively grounded as required
by the NEC and as specified hereinafter. '
B. All metallic raceways shall be mechanically and electrically secure at all joints and at
all boxes, cabinets, fittings and equipment. Metallic raceways entering the motor '
control center control panels or other electrical boxes shall be grounded to the
appropriate ground bus. All metallic raceways shall be electrically continuous
throughout the entire conduit system. Bond wires shall be used in exterior concrete '
pull boxes.
3.04 SUPPORTS 1
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all necessary supports for properly ,
mounting all electrical equipment and raceways. Such supports shall be fabricated
and installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, and care shall be taken that at no
time shall any portion of the building structure be overloaded. Should the building '
structure sustain damage through carelessness or through failure of the
CONTRACTOR to properly support and install the electrical equipment, the
Cardno TBE Pump Station Electrical Provisions 1
S.\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRS\1694Ldoc 16941-10 Fcbruan
1
' CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs involved in repairing or replacing such
installation.
' B. All steel shapes exposed to the weather shall be galvanized after all cutting, drilling,
and/or welding is done. All shop connections shall be welded or riveted and all field
connections shall be bolted on all outdoor structures. Where the field cutting or
' drilling of galvanized steel is necessary, the CONTRACTOR shall apply one (1) coat
of priming paint and one (1) finish coat of aluminum and oil paint.
3.05 TESTS AND CHECKS
IA. The following minimum tests and checks shall be made prior to the termination of
any field wiring.
' 1. Megger terminals and buses after disconnecting devices sensitive to megger
voltage.
2. A 1,000V DC megger shall be used for these tests.
' 3. The first test shall be made with main circuit breaker closed and all remaining
breakers open. A second test shall be made with all circuit breakers closed.
4. The test results shall be recorded and forwarded to the Engineer for his
review. Minimum megger readings shall be 100 megohms in both tests.
B. The following shall be done before energizing any motor control center or control
' panel.
1. Remove all current transformer shunts after completing the secondary circuit.
' 2. Install overload relay heaters based on actual motor nameplate current.
3. Vacuum clean all interior equipment.
' 3.06 SPARE PARTS
' A. Spare parts shall be furnished to permit convenient and quick service restoration
upon failure of a particular unit and shall include the following: One set of spare
parts for each pump station.
'
1. One (1) TAC Pack Telemetry Control Unit (TCU)
2. One (1) Yagi antenna
3. One (1) power supply with battery
' 4. One (1) box of fuses of each type
5. One spare surge suppressor.
' 6. One spare seal failure relay.
7. One spare polypropylene weighted float.
8. Four spare overload relays.
1
Cardno TBE Pump Station Electrical Provisions
S:\Engin\ENG1NEERWG PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIFT STATION 41 REPAIRSU 694 Ldoc 16941-11
Febm
B. The spare parts shall be packed in a manner suitable for long-term storage and shall '
be adequately protected against corrosion, humidity, and temperature.
3.07 WARRANTY
A. Warranty - The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall warrant all hardware and software
provided under this contract against all defects in material and workmanship for a
period of one year. The system supplier shall warrant the telemetry software to be
free of defects for as long as it is operational in the county. The SYSTEM
SUPPLIER shall also provide free updates to this software for the life of the system.
The function modules utilized in the remote terminal units shall carry an additional
two year return-to-factory warranty. The two year return-to-factory warranty shall
also cover damage due to lightning.
3.08 SERVICE
A. Service - The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall offer full factory support of the installed
system through the use of factory employees. Service representatives who are not
direct employees of the SYSTEM SUPPLIER, or who are not specifically trained in
the service of radio telemetry systems shall be unacceptable. The customer shall
have 24 hour per day access to service personnel through the use of a pager. The
SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall keep a fully-configured replacement CPU at their
premises at all times. This unit shall be made available as a temporary replacement
in the event of the system computer failure. Supplier must be able to install
replacement computer within 24 hours of notification of failure. This emergency
spare computer shall be offered at no charge during the warranty period and shall be
offered for only transportation and labor charges after the warranty has expired. The
Owner agrees to take all necessary steps to assure prompt repair of the failed.
3.9 TRAINING
A. Training - The following tabulation indicates the required minimum training required
from the successful bidder. Two full (8 hour) days at the Owner's facility during the
time of system start-up. One full (8 hour) day 2 to 3 weeks after system start-up.
3.10 BULLENTIN BOARD
E. Bulletin Board - The system supplier shall provide a bulletin board service to the
owner. The bulletin board service shall offer information on all modifications or
updates to the system hardware or software. Prior to award and within 10 days of
request, the successful bidder shall be required to demonstrate this service. This
service shall be free of charge for three years.
END OF SECTION
Cardno TBE Pump Station Electrical Provisions
S:\Engin\ENGINEERING PROJECTS\UTILITY PROJECTS\2010\LIPT STATION 41 REPAIRS\16941.doc 16941-12
SECTION V
CONTRACT BOND
1
1
1
1
1
BOND NUMBER: 0 0 7 0 6 8 7
CONTRACT BOND
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF Pine 1 la s
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we TLC Divers if ied Inc. as
Contractor and Westfield Insurance Co an _T
(Surety) whose home address is One Park Circle, Westfield Center, Ohio 44251
HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater,
Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner") in the penal sum of. Three Hundred Sixteen Thousand
Dour „Hundred orty- Fivp_ Dollars ($316, 445.1 0
for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and
assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the 6th day of
April , 201 0 , entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for:
PUMP STATION 41 REIEiABILITATION
PROJECT #:07-0009-UT
a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully
copied herein.
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the
Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the
one-year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract
documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of
Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the
Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be
made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless
the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or
skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents
or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans
furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make
payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or
indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of
the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and
Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the
said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may
be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or
indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of
the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of
said contract.
page 1 of 14 9/24!2008
5ectionV.doc
1
1
CO2flI7M&a DOND
(2)
And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bird themselves, their successors, executors,
administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the said
Owner against, and will pay any and all ammis, damages, costs and judgments which may be
rooovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by
reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance
thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or
servants or the improper performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or
the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done;
as aforesaid, or otherwise.
And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs,
executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the
Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the work,
embraced by said Contract.
And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of
time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or
the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it
does hereby waive notice of any such change:, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms
of the contract or to the work or to the specifications.
iN TESTIMONY WHERFAF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this 2 4 _
day of May , 2010 .
A T:
Joann amberson
WMESS:
CO YGNED:
TLC versified Inc.
CO CTOR
Thurstow-Lamberson, President:
Westfield Insurance Com any
SURETY
By:
A O -FACT
The r Jedlick
seedwWoc
Page 2 of to
9l24rAOI
1
I THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY SUPERCEDES ANY PREVIOUS POWER BEARING THIS SAME
POWER # AND ISSUED PRIOR TO 04/15110, FOR ANY PERSON OR PERSONS NAMED BELOW.
' General
Power
of Attorney
Westfield National Insurance Co.
' CERTIFIED COPY Ohio Farmers Insurances, Co.
Westld Know All Men by These Presents, That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO
' FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporations, hereinafter referred to Individually as a 'Company' and collectively as 'Companies,' duly
organized and existing under the laws of the State of Ohio, and having its principal office in Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these
presents make, constitute and appoint
THEODORE J. JEDLICK
of DAVIE and State of FL its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in•Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name,
place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recogntizances, undertakings, or otter instruments or contracts of
suretyship ---------------------------- ----------------------------•
LIMITATION: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEFICIENCY, MORTGAGE
OO A?EE, OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONDS.
and to bind any of the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate
seal of the applicable Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in
the premises. Said appointment Is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each of the
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY:
"Be It Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity & Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shall
be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for
and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions:
The Attorney-in-Fact. may be given full power and authority for and In the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and
deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements of Indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all
notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such Instruments so executed by any such
Attorney-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary.'
'Be it Further Resolved, that the signature of any such designated person and the seat of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any
power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signatures or facsimile
seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company With respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached.' (Each adopted at a meeting
held on February 8, 2000).
in Witness Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE
COMPANY have caused these presents to be signed by their senior Executive and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 15th day of
APRIL A.D., 2010
,"W,w
Corporate
Seals
N
Affixed ?V •.A+ O
1 40
wk
?
State of Ohio
County of Medina Be.:
N SEAL !M
o:
POWER NO. 0982202 04
Westfield Insurance Co,
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY
!.••-? WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY
••,..?•«• By:
Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Senior Executive
On this 151h day of APRIL A,D., 2010 , before me personally came Richard L. Kinnard, Jr. to me known, Who, being by me duly
sworn, did depose and say, that he resides In Medina, Ohio; that he is Senior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD
NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above
Instrument; that he knows the seals of said Companies; that the seals affixed to said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed
by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies; and that he signed his name thereto by like order.
Notarial
Seal %A.--. S Affixed $? ??p
VAIliam J. Kahelin, A rney at Law, Notary Public
State of Ohio N O My Commission Does Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised Code)
County of Medina ss.: q ?
+
TC' OF O
I, Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS
INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said
Companies, which Is still In full force and effect; and furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are
in full force and effect.
In Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Westfield Center, Ohio, this 2-r{ day of
«la. s
r
ir,U
,. i%oNA..
:moo: .7.-
N SEAL '"
:; •, •r.C
? 'seas
1
Frank A. Carrino', Secret s
1 Rorlaf:J lrnmhlnad% tf16-621
' CONTRACT
This CONTRACT made and entered into this 4!!7 day of , 2010 by and between the
' City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinaft r designated as the "City", and TLC
DIVERSIFIED, INC., of the City of PALMETTO, County of MANATEE and State of Florida,
' hereinafter designated as the "Contractor".
WITNESSETH:
' That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements
on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows:
' The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the
sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at
their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the
following:
PUMP STATION 41 REHABILITAION (07-0009-UT) FOR THE SUM OF: THREE
HUNDRED SIXTEEN THOUSAND FOUR HUNDRED FORTY-FIVE DOLLARS AND TEN
' CENTS DOLLARS ($316,445.10)
In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special
' provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any
advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto
attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this
' contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and
assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City.
If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations
as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the
Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf
and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in
accordance with the provisions as contained herein.
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY
AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE
BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES
ARISING OUT OF'THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF
THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES
TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR
DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY
CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE
CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS
OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED
CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES.
SectionV Page 3 of 14 9/24/2008
CONTRACT
(2)
' In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements:
' In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to
discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or
national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or
termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including
apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees
or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the
provisions of the non-discrimination clause.
' The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including
contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
' It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the
event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated
herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be
due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per-day- for each day that the work to be performed by the
Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per
day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of
the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being filrther agreed that this sum is
' not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the
Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract.
' It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of
this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and
conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or
' sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to
be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own
expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional
bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the
City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and
provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful
' performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form
satisfactory to it.
1
1 SectionV Page 4 of 14 9/24/2008
[ ON FRAIL."1.
IN N ITti E:Ss N HEREOF. the Imnics to the agreement 11.1%c hereunto ,et their hanli? and Sc;?Is .1
halve vxt','utw rhi?'agreement. in duplicate. the da, and Near tint ah?,Nc writ.Icii
ATE:R
IN PINELI,AS ( OUNTI . FLORIDA
\\ illiam 13. Home. 11
('itti Manager
Coutttersigricd:
By
- , '1?.
Ll.
F rwik I I thhar
\1 ayur-f.'??urtc i linl:m he r
Wontracto r must imilcatc v, hethcr Corporation.
I'annership_ Company or lndiv idual. )
I 1 he person signing ,hall. in his oven
handwriting. sign the P'rincipal's natne, his ow n
name. and his title; vxherc the person is signing
fi?r a Corporation. he must. h\ Atlida\it, show
his authonty it, hind the f orporation).
?ttcst:
.-. E Axaca?
a I JUULIeati.
ilerk
.\ppro%cd a, to tone.
Leshe Dou ill Sides
\ss1. tans t ttontc\
TL.C.Divers,i-fied, -Tnc.
Corpo_r-at.ion.,.
((. n ractur
Thurston Lamberson, President
"''\ 11,'111 t"d_c ? , -i ? • .s 2 1 'I 't lh
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT
(CORPORATION FORM)
' STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF
On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to
administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn,
deposes and says:
That he is the (TITLE)
' of TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC., a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located at
271917' STREET EAST, PALMETTO, FLORIDA 34221 (herein, the "Contractor").
That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day
of , 2010 with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as
' Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of:
PUMP STATION 41 REHABILITATION (07-0009-UT)
' That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-
contractors, laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding
' of any nature nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with
said work against the described property.
t That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes,
and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in
full satisfaction and discharge of said contract.
' That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract.
The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of
the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes.
Sworn and subscribed to before me
1 This
day of 12010.
AFFIANT
BY:
NOTARY PUBLIC
My Commission Expires: PRESIDENT
SectionV Page 6 of 14 9/24/2008
AC" °® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 25/10 DATE (MM/DD1YYYY)
oi
PRODUCER 1-813-229-8021 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
N. E. Wilson Co., Inc. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
300 W. Platt St. ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW,
Ste 200
Tampa, FL 33606
INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC #
INSURED INSURER A:WESTFIELD INS CO 24112
TLC Diversified, Inc. --'
INSURER B:FCCI INS CO 10178
2719 17th Street East INSURER C: ?W-
FL 34221
Palmetto INSURER D_ ?W
,
INSURER E:
COVERAGES
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS"
IN
SR
IJE
DD'L
ft=
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY NUMBER
OLICY EFFECTIVE
PDATE (MMQQa=
POLICY EXPIRATION
DATE iWM=80=) _
41MI75
-
A GENERAL LIABILITY TRA3972460 04/01/10 04/01/11 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 11000,000
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
DAMAGE TO RENTED
$ 150,000
CLAIMS MADE ?X OCCUR MED EXP An an* pcraon $ 10,000
X Contractual Liability PERSONAL SADVINJURY $ 11000,000
-
X $500 Prop DmQ Ded GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000
GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000
POLICY X PRO- g LOC
A AUT OMOBILE LIABILITY TRA3972460 04/01/10 04/01/11 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
x ANY AUTO (EaacmIenl) $ 1,000,000
ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
$
SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per P-)
X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $
X NON-OWNEDAUTpS
(Peracadent)
PROPERTY DAMAGE
P $
(
er acodew)
GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY-EA ACCIDENT $
ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $
AUTO ONLY: AGG $
A EXCESS I UMBRELLA LIABILITY TRA3972460 04/01/10 04/01/11 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 51000,000
X OCCUR 0 CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000
DEDUCTIBLE $
x RETENTION S 0 $
S WORKERS COMPENSATION
AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY WC09A61661 04/01/10 04/01/11 X WCSTATU- OTH-
YIN
ANY PROPRICTORIPARTNERIEXECUTIVE
Y
E.L. EACH ACCIDENT
$ 500,000
OFFICERIMEMBER EXCLUDED?
(Mandatory in NH) E.L. DISEASE -EA EMPLOYE $ 500,000
If yes describe under
SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L. DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ 500,000
OTHER
A Installation Floater TRA3972460 04/01/10 04/01/11 Any One Site: 1,000,000
Transit a Storage: Included
Deductible: 11000
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS) VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS
City of Clearwater as additional insured
Purchase Order ST106423, Lift Station 41 Rehabilitation
Iftecutive
CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION
City of Clearwater
Attu; Alice R. Eckman
P.O. Box 4748
Clearwater, FL 33758-4748
USA
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION
DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN
NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL
IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR
REPRESENTATIVES.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
ACORD 25 (2009/01) JL002
15836121
C 1988-2009 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD
IMPORTANT
If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement
on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may
require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate
holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
DISCLAIMER
This Certificate of Insurance does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized
representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend,
extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon.
ACORN 25 (2009/01)